]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/lispref/display.texi
Expunge "allow" + infinitive without direct object from source and doc.
[gnu-emacs] / doc / lispref / display.texi
1 @c -*- mode: texinfo; coding: utf-8 -*-
2 @c This is part of the GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual.
3 @c Copyright (C) 1990-1995, 1998-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @c See the file elisp.texi for copying conditions.
5 @node Display
6 @chapter Emacs Display
7
8 This chapter describes a number of features related to the display
9 that Emacs presents to the user.
10
11 @menu
12 * Refresh Screen:: Clearing the screen and redrawing everything on it.
13 * Forcing Redisplay:: Forcing redisplay.
14 * Truncation:: Folding or wrapping long text lines.
15 * The Echo Area:: Displaying messages at the bottom of the screen.
16 * Warnings:: Displaying warning messages for the user.
17 * Invisible Text:: Hiding part of the buffer text.
18 * Selective Display:: Hiding part of the buffer text (the old way).
19 * Temporary Displays:: Displays that go away automatically.
20 * Overlays:: Use overlays to highlight parts of the buffer.
21 * Size of Displayed Text:: How large displayed text is.
22 * Line Height:: Controlling the height of lines.
23 * Faces:: A face defines a graphics style for text characters:
24 font, colors, etc.
25 * Fringes:: Controlling window fringes.
26 * Scroll Bars:: Controlling scroll bars.
27 * Window Dividers:: Separating windows visually.
28 * Display Property:: Enabling special display features.
29 * Images:: Displaying images in Emacs buffers.
30 * Buttons:: Adding clickable buttons to Emacs buffers.
31 * Abstract Display:: Emacs's Widget for Object Collections.
32 * Blinking:: How Emacs shows the matching open parenthesis.
33 * Character Display:: How Emacs displays individual characters.
34 * Beeping:: Audible signal to the user.
35 * Window Systems:: Which window system is being used.
36 * Bidirectional Display:: Display of bidirectional scripts, such as
37 Arabic and Farsi.
38 @end menu
39
40 @node Refresh Screen
41 @section Refreshing the Screen
42 @cindex refresh the screen
43 @cindex screen refresh
44
45 The function @code{redraw-frame} clears and redisplays the entire
46 contents of a given frame (@pxref{Frames}). This is useful if the
47 screen is corrupted.
48
49 @defun redraw-frame frame
50 This function clears and redisplays frame @var{frame}.
51 @end defun
52
53 Even more powerful is @code{redraw-display}:
54
55 @deffn Command redraw-display
56 This function clears and redisplays all visible frames.
57 @end deffn
58
59 In Emacs, processing user input takes priority over redisplay. If
60 you call these functions when input is available, they don't redisplay
61 immediately, but the requested redisplay does happen
62 eventually---after all the input has been processed.
63
64 On text terminals, suspending and resuming Emacs normally also
65 refreshes the screen. Some terminal emulators record separate
66 contents for display-oriented programs such as Emacs and for ordinary
67 sequential display. If you are using such a terminal, you might want
68 to inhibit the redisplay on resumption.
69
70 @defopt no-redraw-on-reenter
71 @cindex suspend (cf. @code{no-redraw-on-reenter})
72 @cindex resume (cf. @code{no-redraw-on-reenter})
73 This variable controls whether Emacs redraws the entire screen after it
74 has been suspended and resumed. Non-@code{nil} means there is no need
75 to redraw, @code{nil} means redrawing is needed. The default is @code{nil}.
76 @end defopt
77
78 @node Forcing Redisplay
79 @section Forcing Redisplay
80 @cindex forcing redisplay
81
82 Emacs normally tries to redisplay the screen whenever it waits for
83 input. With the following function, you can request an immediate
84 attempt to redisplay, in the middle of Lisp code, without actually
85 waiting for input.
86
87 @defun redisplay &optional force
88 This function tries immediately to redisplay. The optional argument
89 @var{force}, if non-@code{nil}, forces the redisplay to be performed,
90 instead of being preempted if input is pending.
91
92 The function returns @code{t} if it actually tried to redisplay, and
93 @code{nil} otherwise. A value of @code{t} does not mean that
94 redisplay proceeded to completion; it could have been preempted by
95 newly arriving input.
96 @end defun
97
98 Although @code{redisplay} tries immediately to redisplay, it does
99 not change how Emacs decides which parts of its frame(s) to redisplay.
100 By contrast, the following function adds certain windows to the
101 pending redisplay work (as if their contents had completely changed),
102 but does not immediately try to perform redisplay.
103
104 @defun force-window-update &optional object
105 This function forces some or all windows to be updated the next time
106 Emacs does a redisplay. If @var{object} is a window, that window is
107 to be updated. If @var{object} is a buffer or buffer name, all
108 windows displaying that buffer are to be updated. If @var{object} is
109 @code{nil} (or omitted), all windows are to be updated.
110
111 This function does not do a redisplay immediately; Emacs does that as
112 it waits for input, or when the function @code{redisplay} is called.
113 @end defun
114
115 @defvar pre-redisplay-function
116 A function run just before redisplay. It is called with one argument,
117 the set of windows to be redisplayed. The set can be @code{nil},
118 meaning only the selected window, or @code{t}, meaning all the
119 windows.
120 @end defvar
121
122 @defvar pre-redisplay-functions
123 This hook is run just before redisplay. It is called once in each
124 window that is about to be redisplayed, with @code{current-buffer} set
125 to the buffer displayed in that window.
126 @end defvar
127
128 @node Truncation
129 @section Truncation
130 @cindex line wrapping
131 @cindex line truncation
132 @cindex continuation lines
133 @cindex @samp{$} in display
134 @cindex @samp{\} in display
135
136 When a line of text extends beyond the right edge of a window, Emacs
137 can @dfn{continue} the line (make it wrap to the next screen
138 line), or @dfn{truncate} the line (limit it to one screen line). The
139 additional screen lines used to display a long text line are called
140 @dfn{continuation} lines. Continuation is not the same as filling;
141 continuation happens on the screen only, not in the buffer contents,
142 and it breaks a line precisely at the right margin, not at a word
143 boundary. @xref{Filling}.
144
145 On a graphical display, tiny arrow images in the window fringes
146 indicate truncated and continued lines (@pxref{Fringes}). On a text
147 terminal, a @samp{$} in the rightmost column of the window indicates
148 truncation; a @samp{\} on the rightmost column indicates a line that
149 wraps. (The display table can specify alternate characters to use
150 for this; @pxref{Display Tables}).
151
152 @defopt truncate-lines
153 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, lines that extend
154 beyond the right edge of the window are truncated; otherwise, they are
155 continued. As a special exception, the variable
156 @code{truncate-partial-width-windows} takes precedence in
157 @dfn{partial-width} windows (i.e., windows that do not occupy the
158 entire frame width).
159 @end defopt
160
161 @defopt truncate-partial-width-windows
162 @cindex partial-width windows
163 This variable controls line truncation in @dfn{partial-width} windows.
164 A partial-width window is one that does not occupy the entire frame
165 width (@pxref{Splitting Windows}). If the value is @code{nil}, line
166 truncation is determined by the variable @code{truncate-lines} (see
167 above). If the value is an integer @var{n}, lines are truncated if
168 the partial-width window has fewer than @var{n} columns, regardless of
169 the value of @code{truncate-lines}; if the partial-width window has
170 @var{n} or more columns, line truncation is determined by
171 @code{truncate-lines}. For any other non-@code{nil} value, lines are
172 truncated in every partial-width window, regardless of the value of
173 @code{truncate-lines}.
174 @end defopt
175
176 When horizontal scrolling (@pxref{Horizontal Scrolling}) is in use in
177 a window, that forces truncation.
178
179 @defvar wrap-prefix
180 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, it defines a
181 @dfn{wrap prefix} which Emacs displays at the start of every
182 continuation line. (If lines are truncated, @code{wrap-prefix} is
183 never used.) Its value may be a string or an image (@pxref{Other
184 Display Specs}), or a stretch of whitespace such as specified by the
185 @code{:width} or @code{:align-to} display properties (@pxref{Specified
186 Space}). The value is interpreted in the same way as a @code{display}
187 text property. @xref{Display Property}.
188
189 A wrap prefix may also be specified for regions of text, using the
190 @code{wrap-prefix} text or overlay property. This takes precedence
191 over the @code{wrap-prefix} variable. @xref{Special Properties}.
192 @end defvar
193
194 @defvar line-prefix
195 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, it defines a
196 @dfn{line prefix} which Emacs displays at the start of every
197 non-continuation line. Its value may be a string or an image
198 (@pxref{Other Display Specs}), or a stretch of whitespace such as
199 specified by the @code{:width} or @code{:align-to} display properties
200 (@pxref{Specified Space}). The value is interpreted in the same way
201 as a @code{display} text property. @xref{Display Property}.
202
203 A line prefix may also be specified for regions of text using the
204 @code{line-prefix} text or overlay property. This takes precedence
205 over the @code{line-prefix} variable. @xref{Special Properties}.
206 @end defvar
207
208 @ignore
209 If your buffer contains only very short lines, you might find it
210 advisable to set @code{cache-long-scans} to @code{nil}.
211
212 @defvar cache-long-scans
213 If this variable is non-@code{nil} (the default), various indentation
214 and motion functions, and Emacs redisplay, cache the results of
215 scanning the buffer, and consult the cache to avoid rescanning regions
216 of the buffer unless they are modified.
217
218 Turning off the cache speeds up processing of short lines somewhat.
219
220 This variable is automatically buffer-local in every buffer.
221 @end defvar
222 @end ignore
223
224 @node The Echo Area
225 @section The Echo Area
226 @cindex error display
227 @cindex echo area
228
229 @c FIXME: Why not use @xref{Minibuffers} directly? --xfq
230 The @dfn{echo area} is used for displaying error messages
231 (@pxref{Errors}), for messages made with the @code{message} primitive,
232 and for echoing keystrokes. It is not the same as the minibuffer,
233 despite the fact that the minibuffer appears (when active) in the same
234 place on the screen as the echo area. @xref{Minibuffer,, The
235 Minibuffer, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
236
237 Apart from the functions documented in this section, you can print
238 Lisp objects to the echo area by specifying @code{t} as the output
239 stream. @xref{Output Streams}.
240
241 @menu
242 * Displaying Messages:: Explicitly displaying text in the echo area.
243 * Progress:: Informing user about progress of a long operation.
244 * Logging Messages:: Echo area messages are logged for the user.
245 * Echo Area Customization:: Controlling the echo area.
246 @end menu
247
248 @node Displaying Messages
249 @subsection Displaying Messages in the Echo Area
250 @cindex display message in echo area
251
252 This section describes the standard functions for displaying
253 messages in the echo area.
254
255 @defun message format-string &rest arguments
256 This function displays a message in the echo area.
257 @var{format-string} is a format string, and @var{arguments} are the
258 objects for its format specifications, like in the @code{format-message}
259 function (@pxref{Formatting Strings}). The resulting formatted string
260 is displayed in the echo area; if it contains @code{face} text
261 properties, it is displayed with the specified faces (@pxref{Faces}).
262 The string is also added to the @file{*Messages*} buffer, but without
263 text properties (@pxref{Logging Messages}).
264
265 In a format string containing single quotes, curved quotes @t{‘like
266 this’} and grave quotes @t{`like this'} work better than straight
267 quotes @t{'like this'}, as @code{message} typically formats every
268 straight quote as a curved closing quote.
269
270 In batch mode, the message is printed to the standard error stream,
271 followed by a newline.
272
273 When @code{inhibit-message} is non-@code{nil}, no message will be displayed
274 in the echo area, it will only be logged to @samp{*Messages*}.
275
276 If @var{format-string} is @code{nil} or the empty string,
277 @code{message} clears the echo area; if the echo area has been
278 expanded automatically, this brings it back to its normal size. If
279 the minibuffer is active, this brings the minibuffer contents back
280 onto the screen immediately.
281
282 @example
283 @group
284 (message "Reverting `%s'..." (buffer-name))
285 @print{} Reverting ‘subr.el’...
286 @result{} "Reverting ‘subr.el’..."
287 @end group
288
289 @group
290 ---------- Echo Area ----------
291 Reverting ‘subr.el’...
292 ---------- Echo Area ----------
293 @end group
294 @end example
295
296 To automatically display a message in the echo area or in a pop-buffer,
297 depending on its size, use @code{display-message-or-buffer} (see below).
298
299 @strong{Warning:} If you want to use your own string as a message
300 verbatim, don't just write @code{(message @var{string})}. If
301 @var{string} contains @samp{%}, @samp{`}, or @samp{'} it may be
302 reformatted, with undesirable results. Instead, use @code{(message
303 "%s" @var{string})}.
304 @end defun
305
306 @defvar inhibit-message
307 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{message} and related functions
308 will not use the Echo Area to display messages.
309 @end defvar
310
311 @defmac with-temp-message message &rest body
312 This construct displays a message in the echo area temporarily, during
313 the execution of @var{body}. It displays @var{message}, executes
314 @var{body}, then returns the value of the last body form while restoring
315 the previous echo area contents.
316 @end defmac
317
318 @defun message-or-box format-string &rest arguments
319 This function displays a message like @code{message}, but may display it
320 in a dialog box instead of the echo area. If this function is called in
321 a command that was invoked using the mouse---more precisely, if
322 @code{last-nonmenu-event} (@pxref{Command Loop Info}) is either
323 @code{nil} or a list---then it uses a dialog box or pop-up menu to
324 display the message. Otherwise, it uses the echo area. (This is the
325 same criterion that @code{y-or-n-p} uses to make a similar decision; see
326 @ref{Yes-or-No Queries}.)
327
328 You can force use of the mouse or of the echo area by binding
329 @code{last-nonmenu-event} to a suitable value around the call.
330 @end defun
331
332 @defun message-box format-string &rest arguments
333 @anchor{message-box}
334 This function displays a message like @code{message}, but uses a dialog
335 box (or a pop-up menu) whenever that is possible. If it is impossible
336 to use a dialog box or pop-up menu, because the terminal does not
337 support them, then @code{message-box} uses the echo area, like
338 @code{message}.
339 @end defun
340
341 @defun display-message-or-buffer message &optional buffer-name action frame
342 This function displays the message @var{message}, which may be either a
343 string or a buffer. If it is shorter than the maximum height of the
344 echo area, as defined by @code{max-mini-window-height}, it is displayed
345 in the echo area, using @code{message}. Otherwise,
346 @code{display-buffer} is used to show it in a pop-up buffer.
347
348 Returns either the string shown in the echo area, or when a pop-up
349 buffer is used, the window used to display it.
350
351 If @var{message} is a string, then the optional argument
352 @var{buffer-name} is the name of the buffer used to display it when a
353 pop-up buffer is used, defaulting to @file{*Message*}. In the case
354 where @var{message} is a string and displayed in the echo area, it is
355 not specified whether the contents are inserted into the buffer anyway.
356
357 The optional arguments @var{action} and @var{frame} are as for
358 @code{display-buffer}, and only used if a buffer is displayed.
359 @end defun
360
361 @defun current-message
362 This function returns the message currently being displayed in the
363 echo area, or @code{nil} if there is none.
364 @end defun
365
366 @node Progress
367 @subsection Reporting Operation Progress
368 @cindex progress reporting
369
370 When an operation can take a while to finish, you should inform the
371 user about the progress it makes. This way the user can estimate
372 remaining time and clearly see that Emacs is busy working, not hung.
373 A convenient way to do this is to use a @dfn{progress reporter}.
374
375 Here is a working example that does nothing useful:
376
377 @smallexample
378 (let ((progress-reporter
379 (make-progress-reporter "Collecting mana for Emacs..."
380 0 500)))
381 (dotimes (k 500)
382 (sit-for 0.01)
383 (progress-reporter-update progress-reporter k))
384 (progress-reporter-done progress-reporter))
385 @end smallexample
386
387 @defun make-progress-reporter message &optional min-value max-value current-value min-change min-time
388 This function creates and returns a progress reporter object, which
389 you will use as an argument for the other functions listed below. The
390 idea is to precompute as much data as possible to make progress
391 reporting very fast.
392
393 When this progress reporter is subsequently used, it will display
394 @var{message} in the echo area, followed by progress percentage.
395 @var{message} is treated as a simple string. If you need it to depend
396 on a filename, for instance, use @code{format-message} before calling this
397 function.
398
399 The arguments @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} should be numbers
400 standing for the starting and final states of the operation. For
401 instance, an operation that scans a buffer should set these to the
402 results of @code{point-min} and @code{point-max} correspondingly.
403 @var{max-value} should be greater than @var{min-value}.
404
405 Alternatively, you can set @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} to
406 @code{nil}. In that case, the progress reporter does not report
407 process percentages; it instead displays a ``spinner'' that rotates a
408 notch each time you update the progress reporter.
409
410 If @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} are numbers, you can give the
411 argument @var{current-value} a numerical value specifying the initial
412 progress; if omitted, this defaults to @var{min-value}.
413
414 The remaining arguments control the rate of echo area updates. The
415 progress reporter will wait for at least @var{min-change} more
416 percents of the operation to be completed before printing next
417 message; the default is one percent. @var{min-time} specifies the
418 minimum time in seconds to pass between successive prints; the default
419 is 0.2 seconds. (On some operating systems, the progress reporter may
420 handle fractions of seconds with varying precision).
421
422 This function calls @code{progress-reporter-update}, so the first
423 message is printed immediately.
424 @end defun
425
426 @defun progress-reporter-update reporter &optional value
427 This function does the main work of reporting progress of your
428 operation. It displays the message of @var{reporter}, followed by
429 progress percentage determined by @var{value}. If percentage is zero,
430 or close enough according to the @var{min-change} and @var{min-time}
431 arguments, then it is omitted from the output.
432
433 @var{reporter} must be the result of a call to
434 @code{make-progress-reporter}. @var{value} specifies the current
435 state of your operation and must be between @var{min-value} and
436 @var{max-value} (inclusive) as passed to
437 @code{make-progress-reporter}. For instance, if you scan a buffer,
438 then @var{value} should be the result of a call to @code{point}.
439
440 This function respects @var{min-change} and @var{min-time} as passed
441 to @code{make-progress-reporter} and so does not output new messages
442 on every invocation. It is thus very fast and normally you should not
443 try to reduce the number of calls to it: resulting overhead will most
444 likely negate your effort.
445 @end defun
446
447 @defun progress-reporter-force-update reporter &optional value new-message
448 This function is similar to @code{progress-reporter-update} except
449 that it prints a message in the echo area unconditionally.
450
451 The first two arguments have the same meaning as for
452 @code{progress-reporter-update}. Optional @var{new-message} allows
453 you to change the message of the @var{reporter}. Since this function
454 always updates the echo area, such a change will be immediately
455 presented to the user.
456 @end defun
457
458 @defun progress-reporter-done reporter
459 This function should be called when the operation is finished. It
460 prints the message of @var{reporter} followed by word @samp{done} in the
461 echo area.
462
463 You should always call this function and not hope for
464 @code{progress-reporter-update} to print @samp{100%}. Firstly, it may
465 never print it, there are many good reasons for this not to happen.
466 Secondly, @samp{done} is more explicit.
467 @end defun
468
469 @defmac dotimes-with-progress-reporter (var count [result]) message body@dots{}
470 This is a convenience macro that works the same way as @code{dotimes}
471 does, but also reports loop progress using the functions described
472 above. It allows you to save some typing.
473
474 You can rewrite the example in the beginning of this node using
475 this macro this way:
476
477 @example
478 (dotimes-with-progress-reporter
479 (k 500)
480 "Collecting some mana for Emacs..."
481 (sit-for 0.01))
482 @end example
483 @end defmac
484
485 @node Logging Messages
486 @subsection Logging Messages in @file{*Messages*}
487 @cindex logging echo-area messages
488
489 Almost all the messages displayed in the echo area are also recorded
490 in the @file{*Messages*} buffer so that the user can refer back to
491 them. This includes all the messages that are output with
492 @code{message}. By default, this buffer is read-only and uses the major
493 mode @code{messages-buffer-mode}. Nothing prevents the user from
494 killing the @file{*Messages*} buffer, but the next display of a message
495 recreates it. Any Lisp code that needs to access the
496 @file{*Messages*} buffer directly and wants to ensure that it exists
497 should use the function @code{messages-buffer}.
498
499 @defun messages-buffer
500 This function returns the @file{*Messages*} buffer. If it does not
501 exist, it creates it, and switches it to @code{messages-buffer-mode}.
502 @end defun
503
504 @defopt message-log-max
505 This variable specifies how many lines to keep in the @file{*Messages*}
506 buffer. The value @code{t} means there is no limit on how many lines to
507 keep. The value @code{nil} disables message logging entirely. Here's
508 how to display a message and prevent it from being logged:
509
510 @example
511 (let (message-log-max)
512 (message @dots{}))
513 @end example
514 @end defopt
515
516 To make @file{*Messages*} more convenient for the user, the logging
517 facility combines successive identical messages. It also combines
518 successive related messages for the sake of two cases: question
519 followed by answer, and a series of progress messages.
520
521 A question followed by an answer has two messages like the
522 ones produced by @code{y-or-n-p}: the first is @samp{@var{question}},
523 and the second is @samp{@var{question}...@var{answer}}. The first
524 message conveys no additional information beyond what's in the second,
525 so logging the second message discards the first from the log.
526
527 A series of progress messages has successive messages like
528 those produced by @code{make-progress-reporter}. They have the form
529 @samp{@var{base}...@var{how-far}}, where @var{base} is the same each
530 time, while @var{how-far} varies. Logging each message in the series
531 discards the previous one, provided they are consecutive.
532
533 The functions @code{make-progress-reporter} and @code{y-or-n-p}
534 don't have to do anything special to activate the message log
535 combination feature. It operates whenever two consecutive messages
536 are logged that share a common prefix ending in @samp{...}.
537
538 @node Echo Area Customization
539 @subsection Echo Area Customization
540 @cindex echo area customization
541
542 These variables control details of how the echo area works.
543
544 @defvar cursor-in-echo-area
545 This variable controls where the cursor appears when a message is
546 displayed in the echo area. If it is non-@code{nil}, then the cursor
547 appears at the end of the message. Otherwise, the cursor appears at
548 point---not in the echo area at all.
549
550 The value is normally @code{nil}; Lisp programs bind it to @code{t}
551 for brief periods of time.
552 @end defvar
553
554 @defvar echo-area-clear-hook
555 This normal hook is run whenever the echo area is cleared---either by
556 @code{(message nil)} or for any other reason.
557 @end defvar
558
559 @defopt echo-keystrokes
560 This variable determines how much time should elapse before command
561 characters echo. Its value must be a number, and specifies the
562 number of seconds to wait before echoing. If the user types a prefix
563 key (such as @kbd{C-x}) and then delays this many seconds before
564 continuing, the prefix key is echoed in the echo area. (Once echoing
565 begins in a key sequence, all subsequent characters in the same key
566 sequence are echoed immediately.)
567
568 If the value is zero, then command input is not echoed.
569 @end defopt
570
571 @defvar message-truncate-lines
572 Normally, displaying a long message resizes the echo area to display
573 the entire message. But if the variable @code{message-truncate-lines}
574 is non-@code{nil}, the echo area does not resize, and the message is
575 truncated to fit it.
576 @end defvar
577
578 The variable @code{max-mini-window-height}, which specifies the
579 maximum height for resizing minibuffer windows, also applies to the
580 echo area (which is really a special use of the minibuffer window;
581 @pxref{Minibuffer Misc}).
582
583 @node Warnings
584 @section Reporting Warnings
585 @cindex warnings
586
587 @dfn{Warnings} are a facility for a program to inform the user of a
588 possible problem, but continue running.
589
590 @menu
591 * Warning Basics:: Warnings concepts and functions to report them.
592 * Warning Variables:: Variables programs bind to customize their warnings.
593 * Warning Options:: Variables users set to control display of warnings.
594 * Delayed Warnings:: Deferring a warning until the end of a command.
595 @end menu
596
597 @node Warning Basics
598 @subsection Warning Basics
599 @cindex severity level
600
601 Every warning has a textual message, which explains the problem for
602 the user, and a @dfn{severity level} which is a symbol. Here are the
603 possible severity levels, in order of decreasing severity, and their
604 meanings:
605
606 @table @code
607 @item :emergency
608 A problem that will seriously impair Emacs operation soon
609 if you do not attend to it promptly.
610 @item :error
611 A report of data or circumstances that are inherently wrong.
612 @item :warning
613 A report of data or circumstances that are not inherently wrong, but
614 raise suspicion of a possible problem.
615 @item :debug
616 A report of information that may be useful if you are debugging.
617 @end table
618
619 When your program encounters invalid input data, it can either
620 signal a Lisp error by calling @code{error} or @code{signal} or report
621 a warning with severity @code{:error}. Signaling a Lisp error is the
622 easiest thing to do, but it means the program cannot continue
623 processing. If you want to take the trouble to implement a way to
624 continue processing despite the bad data, then reporting a warning of
625 severity @code{:error} is the right way to inform the user of the
626 problem. For instance, the Emacs Lisp byte compiler can report an
627 error that way and continue compiling other functions. (If the
628 program signals a Lisp error and then handles it with
629 @code{condition-case}, the user won't see the error message; it could
630 show the message to the user by reporting it as a warning.)
631
632 @c FIXME: Why use "(bytecomp)" instead of "'bytecomp" or simply
633 @c "bytecomp" here? The parens are part of warning-type-format but
634 @c not part of the warning type. --xfq
635 @cindex warning type
636 Each warning has a @dfn{warning type} to classify it. The type is a
637 list of symbols. The first symbol should be the custom group that you
638 use for the program's user options. For example, byte compiler
639 warnings use the warning type @code{(bytecomp)}. You can also
640 subcategorize the warnings, if you wish, by using more symbols in the
641 list.
642
643 @defun display-warning type message &optional level buffer-name
644 This function reports a warning, using @var{message} as the message
645 and @var{type} as the warning type. @var{level} should be the
646 severity level, with @code{:warning} being the default.
647
648 @var{buffer-name}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the name of the buffer
649 for logging the warning. By default, it is @file{*Warnings*}.
650 @end defun
651
652 @defun lwarn type level message &rest args
653 This function reports a warning using the value of @code{(format-message
654 @var{message} @var{args}...)} as the message in the @file{*Warnings*}
655 buffer. In other respects it is equivalent to @code{display-warning}.
656 @end defun
657
658 @defun warn message &rest args
659 This function reports a warning using the value of @code{(format-message
660 @var{message} @var{args}...)} as the message, @code{(emacs)} as the
661 type, and @code{:warning} as the severity level. It exists for
662 compatibility only; we recommend not using it, because you should
663 specify a specific warning type.
664 @end defun
665
666 @node Warning Variables
667 @subsection Warning Variables
668 @cindex warning variables
669
670 Programs can customize how their warnings appear by binding
671 the variables described in this section.
672
673 @defvar warning-levels
674 This list defines the meaning and severity order of the warning
675 severity levels. Each element defines one severity level,
676 and they are arranged in order of decreasing severity.
677
678 Each element has the form @code{(@var{level} @var{string}
679 @var{function})}, where @var{level} is the severity level it defines.
680 @var{string} specifies the textual description of this level.
681 @var{string} should use @samp{%s} to specify where to put the warning
682 type information, or it can omit the @samp{%s} so as not to include
683 that information.
684
685 The optional @var{function}, if non-@code{nil}, is a function to call
686 with no arguments, to get the user's attention.
687
688 Normally you should not change the value of this variable.
689 @end defvar
690
691 @defvar warning-prefix-function
692 If non-@code{nil}, the value is a function to generate prefix text for
693 warnings. Programs can bind the variable to a suitable function.
694 @code{display-warning} calls this function with the warnings buffer
695 current, and the function can insert text in it. That text becomes
696 the beginning of the warning message.
697
698 The function is called with two arguments, the severity level and its
699 entry in @code{warning-levels}. It should return a list to use as the
700 entry (this value need not be an actual member of
701 @code{warning-levels}). By constructing this value, the function can
702 change the severity of the warning, or specify different handling for
703 a given severity level.
704
705 If the variable's value is @code{nil} then there is no function
706 to call.
707 @end defvar
708
709 @defvar warning-series
710 Programs can bind this variable to @code{t} to say that the next
711 warning should begin a series. When several warnings form a series,
712 that means to leave point on the first warning of the series, rather
713 than keep moving it for each warning so that it appears on the last one.
714 The series ends when the local binding is unbound and
715 @code{warning-series} becomes @code{nil} again.
716
717 The value can also be a symbol with a function definition. That is
718 equivalent to @code{t}, except that the next warning will also call
719 the function with no arguments with the warnings buffer current. The
720 function can insert text which will serve as a header for the series
721 of warnings.
722
723 Once a series has begun, the value is a marker which points to the
724 buffer position in the warnings buffer of the start of the series.
725
726 The variable's normal value is @code{nil}, which means to handle
727 each warning separately.
728 @end defvar
729
730 @defvar warning-fill-prefix
731 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, it specifies a fill prefix to
732 use for filling each warning's text.
733 @end defvar
734
735 @defvar warning-type-format
736 This variable specifies the format for displaying the warning type
737 in the warning message. The result of formatting the type this way
738 gets included in the message under the control of the string in the
739 entry in @code{warning-levels}. The default value is @code{" (%s)"}.
740 If you bind it to @code{""} then the warning type won't appear at
741 all.
742 @end defvar
743
744 @node Warning Options
745 @subsection Warning Options
746 @cindex warning options
747
748 These variables are used by users to control what happens
749 when a Lisp program reports a warning.
750
751 @defopt warning-minimum-level
752 This user option specifies the minimum severity level that should be
753 shown immediately to the user. The default is @code{:warning}, which
754 means to immediately display all warnings except @code{:debug}
755 warnings.
756 @end defopt
757
758 @defopt warning-minimum-log-level
759 This user option specifies the minimum severity level that should be
760 logged in the warnings buffer. The default is @code{:warning}, which
761 means to log all warnings except @code{:debug} warnings.
762 @end defopt
763
764 @defopt warning-suppress-types
765 This list specifies which warning types should not be displayed
766 immediately for the user. Each element of the list should be a list
767 of symbols. If its elements match the first elements in a warning
768 type, then that warning is not displayed immediately.
769 @end defopt
770
771 @defopt warning-suppress-log-types
772 This list specifies which warning types should not be logged in the
773 warnings buffer. Each element of the list should be a list of
774 symbols. If it matches the first few elements in a warning type, then
775 that warning is not logged.
776 @end defopt
777
778 @node Delayed Warnings
779 @subsection Delayed Warnings
780 @cindex delayed warnings
781
782 Sometimes, you may wish to avoid showing a warning while a command is
783 running, and only show it only after the end of the command. You can
784 use the variable @code{delayed-warnings-list} for this.
785
786 @defvar delayed-warnings-list
787 The value of this variable is a list of warnings to be displayed after
788 the current command has finished. Each element must be a list
789
790 @smallexample
791 (@var{type} @var{message} [@var{level} [@var{buffer-name}]])
792 @end smallexample
793
794 @noindent
795 with the same form, and the same meanings, as the argument list of
796 @code{display-warning} (@pxref{Warning Basics}). Immediately after
797 running @code{post-command-hook} (@pxref{Command Overview}), the Emacs
798 command loop displays all the warnings specified by this variable,
799 then resets it to @code{nil}.
800 @end defvar
801
802 Programs which need to further customize the delayed warnings
803 mechanism can change the variable @code{delayed-warnings-hook}:
804
805 @defvar delayed-warnings-hook
806 This is a normal hook which is run by the Emacs command loop, after
807 @code{post-command-hook}, in order to to process and display delayed
808 warnings.
809
810 Its default value is a list of two functions:
811
812 @smallexample
813 (collapse-delayed-warnings display-delayed-warnings)
814 @end smallexample
815
816 @findex collapse-delayed-warnings
817 @findex display-delayed-warnings
818 @noindent
819 The function @code{collapse-delayed-warnings} removes repeated entries
820 from @code{delayed-warnings-list}. The function
821 @code{display-delayed-warnings} calls @code{display-warning} on each
822 of the entries in @code{delayed-warnings-list}, in turn, and then sets
823 @code{delayed-warnings-list} to @code{nil}.
824 @end defvar
825
826 @node Invisible Text
827 @section Invisible Text
828
829 @cindex invisible text
830 You can make characters @dfn{invisible}, so that they do not appear on
831 the screen, with the @code{invisible} property. This can be either a
832 text property (@pxref{Text Properties}) or an overlay property
833 (@pxref{Overlays}). Cursor motion also partly ignores these
834 characters; if the command loop finds that point is inside a range of
835 invisible text after a command, it relocates point to the other side
836 of the text.
837
838 In the simplest case, any non-@code{nil} @code{invisible} property makes
839 a character invisible. This is the default case---if you don't alter
840 the default value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}, this is how the
841 @code{invisible} property works. You should normally use @code{t}
842 as the value of the @code{invisible} property if you don't plan
843 to set @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} yourself.
844
845 More generally, you can use the variable @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}
846 to control which values of the @code{invisible} property make text
847 invisible. This permits you to classify the text into different subsets
848 in advance, by giving them different @code{invisible} values, and
849 subsequently make various subsets visible or invisible by changing the
850 value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}.
851
852 Controlling visibility with @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} is
853 especially useful in a program to display the list of entries in a
854 database. It permits the implementation of convenient filtering
855 commands to view just a part of the entries in the database. Setting
856 this variable is very fast, much faster than scanning all the text in
857 the buffer looking for properties to change.
858
859 @defvar buffer-invisibility-spec
860 This variable specifies which kinds of @code{invisible} properties
861 actually make a character invisible. Setting this variable makes it
862 buffer-local.
863
864 @table @asis
865 @item @code{t}
866 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property is
867 non-@code{nil}. This is the default.
868
869 @item a list
870 Each element of the list specifies a criterion for invisibility; if a
871 character's @code{invisible} property fits any one of these criteria,
872 the character is invisible. The list can have two kinds of elements:
873
874 @table @code
875 @item @var{atom}
876 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property value is
877 @var{atom} or if it is a list with @var{atom} as a member; comparison
878 is done with @code{eq}.
879
880 @item (@var{atom} . t)
881 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property value is
882 @var{atom} or if it is a list with @var{atom} as a member; comparison
883 is done with @code{eq}. Moreover, a sequence of such characters
884 displays as an ellipsis.
885 @end table
886 @end table
887 @end defvar
888
889 Two functions are specifically provided for adding elements to
890 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} and removing elements from it.
891
892 @defun add-to-invisibility-spec element
893 This function adds the element @var{element} to
894 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}. If @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}
895 was @code{t}, it changes to a list, @code{(t)}, so that text whose
896 @code{invisible} property is @code{t} remains invisible.
897 @end defun
898
899 @defun remove-from-invisibility-spec element
900 This removes the element @var{element} from
901 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}. This does nothing if @var{element}
902 is not in the list.
903 @end defun
904
905 A convention for use of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} is that a
906 major mode should use the mode's own name as an element of
907 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} and as the value of the
908 @code{invisible} property:
909
910 @example
911 ;; @r{If you want to display an ellipsis:}
912 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
913 ;; @r{If you don't want ellipsis:}
914 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
915
916 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end)
917 'invisible 'my-symbol)
918
919 ;; @r{When done with the invisibility:}
920 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
921 ;; @r{Or respectively:}
922 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
923 @end example
924
925 You can check for invisibility using the following function:
926
927 @defun invisible-p pos-or-prop
928 If @var{pos-or-prop} is a marker or number, this function returns a
929 non-@code{nil} value if the text at that position is invisible.
930
931 If @var{pos-or-prop} is any other kind of Lisp object, that is taken
932 to mean a possible value of the @code{invisible} text or overlay
933 property. In that case, this function returns a non-@code{nil} value
934 if that value would cause text to become invisible, based on the
935 current value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}.
936 @end defun
937
938 @vindex line-move-ignore-invisible
939 Ordinarily, functions that operate on text or move point do not care
940 whether the text is invisible, they process invisible characters and
941 visible characters alike. The user-level line motion commands,
942 such as @code{next-line}, @code{previous-line}, ignore invisible
943 newlines if @code{line-move-ignore-invisible} is non-@code{nil} (the
944 default), i.e., behave like these invisible newlines didn't exist in
945 the buffer, but only because they are explicitly programmed to do so.
946
947 If a command ends with point inside or at the boundary of
948 invisible text, the main editing loop relocates point to one of the
949 two ends of the invisible text. Emacs chooses the direction of
950 relocation so that it is the same as the overall movement direction of
951 the command; if in doubt, it prefers a position where an inserted char
952 would not inherit the @code{invisible} property. Additionally, if the
953 text is not replaced by an ellipsis and the command only moved within
954 the invisible text, then point is moved one extra character so as to
955 try and reflect the command's movement by a visible movement of the
956 cursor.
957
958 Thus, if the command moved point back to an invisible range (with the usual
959 stickiness), Emacs moves point back to the beginning of that range. If the
960 command moved point forward into an invisible range, Emacs moves point forward
961 to the first visible character that follows the invisible text and then forward
962 one more character.
963
964 These @dfn{adjustments} of point that ended up in the middle of
965 invisible text can be disabled by setting @code{disable-point-adjustment}
966 to a non-@code{nil} value. @xref{Adjusting Point}.
967
968 Incremental search can make invisible overlays visible temporarily
969 and/or permanently when a match includes invisible text. To enable
970 this, the overlay should have a non-@code{nil}
971 @code{isearch-open-invisible} property. The property value should be a
972 function to be called with the overlay as an argument. This function
973 should make the overlay visible permanently; it is used when the match
974 overlaps the overlay on exit from the search.
975
976 During the search, such overlays are made temporarily visible by
977 temporarily modifying their invisible and intangible properties. If you
978 want this to be done differently for a certain overlay, give it an
979 @code{isearch-open-invisible-temporary} property which is a function.
980 The function is called with two arguments: the first is the overlay, and
981 the second is @code{nil} to make the overlay visible, or @code{t} to
982 make it invisible again.
983
984 @node Selective Display
985 @section Selective Display
986 @c @cindex selective display Duplicates selective-display
987
988 @dfn{Selective display} refers to a pair of related features for
989 hiding certain lines on the screen.
990
991 @cindex explicit selective display
992 The first variant, explicit selective display, was designed for use in a Lisp
993 program: it controls which lines are hidden by altering the text. This kind of
994 hiding is now obsolete; instead you can get the same effect with the
995 @code{invisible} property (@pxref{Invisible Text}).
996
997 In the second variant, the choice of lines to hide is made
998 automatically based on indentation. This variant is designed to be a
999 user-level feature.
1000
1001 The way you control explicit selective display is by replacing a
1002 newline (control-j) with a carriage return (control-m). The text that
1003 was formerly a line following that newline is now hidden. Strictly
1004 speaking, it is temporarily no longer a line at all, since only
1005 newlines can separate lines; it is now part of the previous line.
1006
1007 Selective display does not directly affect editing commands. For
1008 example, @kbd{C-f} (@code{forward-char}) moves point unhesitatingly
1009 into hidden text. However, the replacement of newline characters with
1010 carriage return characters affects some editing commands. For
1011 example, @code{next-line} skips hidden lines, since it searches only
1012 for newlines. Modes that use selective display can also define
1013 commands that take account of the newlines, or that control which
1014 parts of the text are hidden.
1015
1016 When you write a selectively displayed buffer into a file, all the
1017 control-m's are output as newlines. This means that when you next read
1018 in the file, it looks OK, with nothing hidden. The selective display
1019 effect is seen only within Emacs.
1020
1021 @defvar selective-display
1022 This buffer-local variable enables selective display. This means that
1023 lines, or portions of lines, may be made hidden.
1024
1025 @itemize @bullet
1026 @item
1027 If the value of @code{selective-display} is @code{t}, then the character
1028 control-m marks the start of hidden text; the control-m, and the rest
1029 of the line following it, are not displayed. This is explicit selective
1030 display.
1031
1032 @item
1033 If the value of @code{selective-display} is a positive integer, then
1034 lines that start with more than that many columns of indentation are not
1035 displayed.
1036 @end itemize
1037
1038 When some portion of a buffer is hidden, the vertical movement
1039 commands operate as if that portion did not exist, allowing a single
1040 @code{next-line} command to skip any number of hidden lines.
1041 However, character movement commands (such as @code{forward-char}) do
1042 not skip the hidden portion, and it is possible (if tricky) to insert
1043 or delete text in an hidden portion.
1044
1045 In the examples below, we show the @emph{display appearance} of the
1046 buffer @code{foo}, which changes with the value of
1047 @code{selective-display}. The @emph{contents} of the buffer do not
1048 change.
1049
1050 @example
1051 @group
1052 (setq selective-display nil)
1053 @result{} nil
1054
1055 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1056 1 on this column
1057 2on this column
1058 3n this column
1059 3n this column
1060 2on this column
1061 1 on this column
1062 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1063 @end group
1064
1065 @group
1066 (setq selective-display 2)
1067 @result{} 2
1068
1069 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1070 1 on this column
1071 2on this column
1072 2on this column
1073 1 on this column
1074 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1075 @end group
1076 @end example
1077 @end defvar
1078
1079 @defopt selective-display-ellipses
1080 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, then Emacs displays
1081 @samp{@dots{}} at the end of a line that is followed by hidden text.
1082 This example is a continuation of the previous one.
1083
1084 @example
1085 @group
1086 (setq selective-display-ellipses t)
1087 @result{} t
1088
1089 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1090 1 on this column
1091 2on this column ...
1092 2on this column
1093 1 on this column
1094 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1095 @end group
1096 @end example
1097
1098 You can use a display table to substitute other text for the ellipsis
1099 (@samp{@dots{}}). @xref{Display Tables}.
1100 @end defopt
1101
1102 @node Temporary Displays
1103 @section Temporary Displays
1104 @cindex temporary display
1105 @cindex temporary buffer display
1106
1107 Temporary displays are used by Lisp programs to put output into a
1108 buffer and then present it to the user for perusal rather than for
1109 editing. Many help commands use this feature.
1110
1111 @defmac with-output-to-temp-buffer buffer-name body@dots{}
1112 This function executes the forms in @var{body} while arranging to insert
1113 any output they print into the buffer named @var{buffer-name}, which is
1114 first created if necessary, and put into Help mode. (See the similar
1115 form @code{with-temp-buffer-window} below.) Finally, the buffer is
1116 displayed in some window, but that window is not selected.
1117
1118 If the forms in @var{body} do not change the major mode in the output
1119 buffer, so that it is still Help mode at the end of their execution,
1120 then @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} makes this buffer read-only at
1121 the end, and also scans it for function and variable names to make them
1122 into clickable cross-references. @xref{Docstring hyperlinks, , Tips for
1123 Documentation Strings}, in particular the item on hyperlinks in
1124 documentation strings, for more details.
1125
1126 The string @var{buffer-name} specifies the temporary buffer, which need
1127 not already exist. The argument must be a string, not a buffer. The
1128 buffer is erased initially (with no questions asked), and it is marked
1129 as unmodified after @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} exits.
1130
1131 @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} binds @code{standard-output} to the
1132 temporary buffer, then it evaluates the forms in @var{body}. Output
1133 using the Lisp output functions within @var{body} goes by default to
1134 that buffer (but screen display and messages in the echo area, although
1135 they are ``output'' in the general sense of the word, are not affected).
1136 @xref{Output Functions}.
1137
1138 Several hooks are available for customizing the behavior
1139 of this construct; they are listed below.
1140
1141 The value of the last form in @var{body} is returned.
1142
1143 @example
1144 @group
1145 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1146 This is the contents of foo.
1147 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1148 @end group
1149
1150 @group
1151 (with-output-to-temp-buffer "foo"
1152 (print 20)
1153 (print standard-output))
1154 @result{} #<buffer foo>
1155
1156 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1157
1158 20
1159
1160 #<buffer foo>
1161
1162 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1163 @end group
1164 @end example
1165 @end defmac
1166
1167 @defopt temp-buffer-show-function
1168 If this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}
1169 calls it as a function to do the job of displaying a help buffer. The
1170 function gets one argument, which is the buffer it should display.
1171
1172 It is a good idea for this function to run @code{temp-buffer-show-hook}
1173 just as @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} normally would, inside of
1174 @code{save-selected-window} and with the chosen window and buffer
1175 selected.
1176 @end defopt
1177
1178 @defvar temp-buffer-setup-hook
1179 This normal hook is run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} before
1180 evaluating @var{body}. When the hook runs, the temporary buffer is
1181 current. This hook is normally set up with a function to put the
1182 buffer in Help mode.
1183 @end defvar
1184
1185 @defvar temp-buffer-show-hook
1186 This normal hook is run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} after
1187 displaying the temporary buffer. When the hook runs, the temporary buffer
1188 is current, and the window it was displayed in is selected.
1189 @end defvar
1190
1191 @defmac with-temp-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function body@dots{}
1192 This macro is similar to @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}. Like that
1193 construct, it executes @var{body} while arranging to insert any output
1194 it prints into the buffer named @var{buffer-or-name} and displays that
1195 buffer in some window. Unlike @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer},
1196 however, it does not automatically switch that buffer to Help mode.
1197
1198 The argument @var{buffer-or-name} specifies the temporary buffer. It
1199 can be either a buffer, which must already exist, or a string, in which
1200 case a buffer of that name is created, if necessary. The buffer is
1201 marked as unmodified and read-only when @code{with-temp-buffer-window}
1202 exits.
1203
1204 This macro does not call @code{temp-buffer-show-function}. Rather, it
1205 passes the @var{action} argument to @code{display-buffer}
1206 (@pxref{Choosing Window}) in order to display the buffer.
1207
1208 The value of the last form in @var{body} is returned, unless the
1209 argument @var{quit-function} is specified. In that case, it is called
1210 with two arguments: the window showing the buffer and the result of
1211 @var{body}. The final return value is then whatever @var{quit-function}
1212 returns.
1213
1214 @vindex temp-buffer-window-setup-hook
1215 @vindex temp-buffer-window-show-hook
1216 This macro uses the normal hooks @code{temp-buffer-window-setup-hook}
1217 and @code{temp-buffer-window-show-hook} in place of the analogous hooks
1218 run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}.
1219 @end defmac
1220
1221 The two constructs described next are mostly identical to
1222 @code{with-temp-buffer-window} but differ from it as specified:
1223
1224 @defmac with-current-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function &rest body
1225 This macro is like @code{with-temp-buffer-window} but unlike that makes
1226 the buffer specified by @var{buffer-or-name} current for running
1227 @var{body}.
1228 @end defmac
1229
1230 @defmac with-displayed-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function &rest body
1231 This macro is like @code{with-current-buffer-window} but unlike that
1232 displays the buffer specified by @var{buffer-or-name} @emph{before}
1233 running @var{body}.
1234 @end defmac
1235
1236 A window showing a temporary buffer can be fit to the size of that
1237 buffer using the following mode:
1238
1239 @defopt temp-buffer-resize-mode
1240 When this minor mode is enabled, windows showing a temporary buffer are
1241 automatically resized to fit their buffer's contents.
1242
1243 A window is resized if and only if it has been specially created for the
1244 buffer. In particular, windows that have shown another buffer before
1245 are not resized. By default, this mode uses @code{fit-window-to-buffer}
1246 (@pxref{Resizing Windows}) for resizing. You can specify a different
1247 function by customizing the options @code{temp-buffer-max-height} and
1248 @code{temp-buffer-max-width} below.
1249 @end defopt
1250
1251 @defopt temp-buffer-max-height
1252 This option specifies the maximum height (in lines) of a window
1253 displaying a temporary buffer when @code{temp-buffer-resize-mode} is
1254 enabled. It can also be a function to be called to choose the height
1255 for such a buffer. It gets one argument, the buffer, and should return
1256 a positive integer. At the time the function is called, the window to
1257 be resized is selected.
1258 @end defopt
1259
1260 @defopt temp-buffer-max-width
1261 This option specifies the maximum width of a window (in columns)
1262 displaying a temporary buffer when @code{temp-buffer-resize-mode} is
1263 enabled. It can also be a function to be called to choose the width for
1264 such a buffer. It gets one argument, the buffer, and should return a
1265 positive integer. At the time the function is called, the window to be
1266 resized is selected.
1267 @end defopt
1268
1269 The following function uses the current buffer for temporal display:
1270
1271 @defun momentary-string-display string position &optional char message
1272 This function momentarily displays @var{string} in the current buffer at
1273 @var{position}. It has no effect on the undo list or on the buffer's
1274 modification status.
1275
1276 The momentary display remains until the next input event. If the next
1277 input event is @var{char}, @code{momentary-string-display} ignores it
1278 and returns. Otherwise, that event remains buffered for subsequent use
1279 as input. Thus, typing @var{char} will simply remove the string from
1280 the display, while typing (say) @kbd{C-f} will remove the string from
1281 the display and later (presumably) move point forward. The argument
1282 @var{char} is a space by default.
1283
1284 The return value of @code{momentary-string-display} is not meaningful.
1285
1286 If the string @var{string} does not contain control characters, you can
1287 do the same job in a more general way by creating (and then subsequently
1288 deleting) an overlay with a @code{before-string} property.
1289 @xref{Overlay Properties}.
1290
1291 If @var{message} is non-@code{nil}, it is displayed in the echo area
1292 while @var{string} is displayed in the buffer. If it is @code{nil}, a
1293 default message says to type @var{char} to continue.
1294
1295 In this example, point is initially located at the beginning of the
1296 second line:
1297
1298 @example
1299 @group
1300 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1301 This is the contents of foo.
1302 @point{}Second line.
1303 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1304 @end group
1305
1306 @group
1307 (momentary-string-display
1308 "**** Important Message! ****"
1309 (point) ?\r
1310 "Type RET when done reading")
1311 @result{} t
1312 @end group
1313
1314 @group
1315 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1316 This is the contents of foo.
1317 **** Important Message! ****Second line.
1318 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1319
1320 ---------- Echo Area ----------
1321 Type RET when done reading
1322 ---------- Echo Area ----------
1323 @end group
1324 @end example
1325 @end defun
1326
1327 @node Overlays
1328 @section Overlays
1329 @cindex overlays
1330 @c FIXME: mention intervals in this section?
1331
1332 You can use @dfn{overlays} to alter the appearance of a buffer's text on
1333 the screen, for the sake of presentation features. An overlay is an
1334 object that belongs to a particular buffer, and has a specified
1335 beginning and end. It also has properties that you can examine and set;
1336 these affect the display of the text within the overlay.
1337
1338 @cindex scalability of overlays
1339 @cindex overlays, scalability
1340 The visual effect of an overlay is the same as of the corresponding
1341 text property (@pxref{Text Properties}). However, due to a different
1342 implementation, overlays generally don't scale well (many operations
1343 take a time that is proportional to the number of overlays in the
1344 buffer). If you need to affect the visual appearance of many portions
1345 in the buffer, we recommend using text properties.
1346
1347 An overlay uses markers to record its beginning and end; thus,
1348 editing the text of the buffer adjusts the beginning and end of each
1349 overlay so that it stays with the text. When you create the overlay,
1350 you can specify whether text inserted at the beginning should be
1351 inside the overlay or outside, and likewise for the end of the overlay.
1352
1353 @menu
1354 * Managing Overlays:: Creating and moving overlays.
1355 * Overlay Properties:: How to read and set properties.
1356 What properties do to the screen display.
1357 * Finding Overlays:: Searching for overlays.
1358 @end menu
1359
1360 @node Managing Overlays
1361 @subsection Managing Overlays
1362 @cindex managing overlays
1363 @cindex overlays, managing
1364
1365 This section describes the functions to create, delete and move
1366 overlays, and to examine their contents. Overlay changes are not
1367 recorded in the buffer's undo list, since the overlays are not
1368 part of the buffer's contents.
1369
1370 @defun overlayp object
1371 This function returns @code{t} if @var{object} is an overlay.
1372 @end defun
1373
1374 @defun make-overlay start end &optional buffer front-advance rear-advance
1375 This function creates and returns an overlay that belongs to
1376 @var{buffer} and ranges from @var{start} to @var{end}. Both @var{start}
1377 and @var{end} must specify buffer positions; they may be integers or
1378 markers. If @var{buffer} is omitted, the overlay is created in the
1379 current buffer.
1380
1381 @cindex empty overlay
1382 @cindex overlay, empty
1383 An overlay whose @var{start} and @var{end} specify the same buffer
1384 position is known as @dfn{empty}. A non-empty overlay can become
1385 empty if the text between its @var{start} and @var{end} is deleted.
1386 When that happens, the overlay is by default not deleted, but you can
1387 cause it to be deleted by giving it the @samp{evaporate} property
1388 (@pxref{Overlay Properties, evaporate property}).
1389
1390 The arguments @var{front-advance} and @var{rear-advance} specify the
1391 marker insertion type for the start of the overlay and for the end of
1392 the overlay, respectively. @xref{Marker Insertion Types}. If they
1393 are both @code{nil}, the default, then the overlay extends to include
1394 any text inserted at the beginning, but not text inserted at the end.
1395 If @var{front-advance} is non-@code{nil}, text inserted at the
1396 beginning of the overlay is excluded from the overlay. If
1397 @var{rear-advance} is non-@code{nil}, text inserted at the end of the
1398 overlay is included in the overlay.
1399 @end defun
1400
1401 @defun overlay-start overlay
1402 This function returns the position at which @var{overlay} starts,
1403 as an integer.
1404 @end defun
1405
1406 @defun overlay-end overlay
1407 This function returns the position at which @var{overlay} ends,
1408 as an integer.
1409 @end defun
1410
1411 @defun overlay-buffer overlay
1412 This function returns the buffer that @var{overlay} belongs to. It
1413 returns @code{nil} if @var{overlay} has been deleted.
1414 @end defun
1415
1416 @defun delete-overlay overlay
1417 This function deletes @var{overlay}. The overlay continues to exist as
1418 a Lisp object, and its property list is unchanged, but it ceases to be
1419 attached to the buffer it belonged to, and ceases to have any effect on
1420 display.
1421
1422 A deleted overlay is not permanently disconnected. You can give it a
1423 position in a buffer again by calling @code{move-overlay}.
1424 @end defun
1425
1426 @defun move-overlay overlay start end &optional buffer
1427 This function moves @var{overlay} to @var{buffer}, and places its bounds
1428 at @var{start} and @var{end}. Both arguments @var{start} and @var{end}
1429 must specify buffer positions; they may be integers or markers.
1430
1431 If @var{buffer} is omitted, @var{overlay} stays in the same buffer it
1432 was already associated with; if @var{overlay} was deleted, it goes into
1433 the current buffer.
1434
1435 The return value is @var{overlay}.
1436
1437 This is the only valid way to change the endpoints of an overlay. Do
1438 not try modifying the markers in the overlay by hand, as that fails to
1439 update other vital data structures and can cause some overlays to be
1440 lost.
1441 @end defun
1442
1443 @defun remove-overlays &optional start end name value
1444 This function removes all the overlays between @var{start} and
1445 @var{end} whose property @var{name} has the value @var{value}. It can
1446 move the endpoints of the overlays in the region, or split them.
1447
1448 If @var{name} is omitted or @code{nil}, it means to delete all overlays in
1449 the specified region. If @var{start} and/or @var{end} are omitted or
1450 @code{nil}, that means the beginning and end of the buffer respectively.
1451 Therefore, @code{(remove-overlays)} removes all the overlays in the
1452 current buffer.
1453 @end defun
1454
1455 @defun copy-overlay overlay
1456 This function returns a copy of @var{overlay}. The copy has the same
1457 endpoints and properties as @var{overlay}. However, the marker
1458 insertion type for the start of the overlay and for the end of the
1459 overlay are set to their default values (@pxref{Marker Insertion
1460 Types}).
1461 @end defun
1462
1463 Here are some examples:
1464
1465 @example
1466 ;; @r{Create an overlay.}
1467 (setq foo (make-overlay 1 10))
1468 @result{} #<overlay from 1 to 10 in display.texi>
1469 (overlay-start foo)
1470 @result{} 1
1471 (overlay-end foo)
1472 @result{} 10
1473 (overlay-buffer foo)
1474 @result{} #<buffer display.texi>
1475 ;; @r{Give it a property we can check later.}
1476 (overlay-put foo 'happy t)
1477 @result{} t
1478 ;; @r{Verify the property is present.}
1479 (overlay-get foo 'happy)
1480 @result{} t
1481 ;; @r{Move the overlay.}
1482 (move-overlay foo 5 20)
1483 @result{} #<overlay from 5 to 20 in display.texi>
1484 (overlay-start foo)
1485 @result{} 5
1486 (overlay-end foo)
1487 @result{} 20
1488 ;; @r{Delete the overlay.}
1489 (delete-overlay foo)
1490 @result{} nil
1491 ;; @r{Verify it is deleted.}
1492 foo
1493 @result{} #<overlay in no buffer>
1494 ;; @r{A deleted overlay has no position.}
1495 (overlay-start foo)
1496 @result{} nil
1497 (overlay-end foo)
1498 @result{} nil
1499 (overlay-buffer foo)
1500 @result{} nil
1501 ;; @r{Undelete the overlay.}
1502 (move-overlay foo 1 20)
1503 @result{} #<overlay from 1 to 20 in display.texi>
1504 ;; @r{Verify the results.}
1505 (overlay-start foo)
1506 @result{} 1
1507 (overlay-end foo)
1508 @result{} 20
1509 (overlay-buffer foo)
1510 @result{} #<buffer display.texi>
1511 ;; @r{Moving and deleting the overlay does not change its properties.}
1512 (overlay-get foo 'happy)
1513 @result{} t
1514 @end example
1515
1516 Emacs stores the overlays of each buffer in two lists, divided
1517 around an arbitrary center position. One list extends backwards
1518 through the buffer from that center position, and the other extends
1519 forwards from that center position. The center position can be anywhere
1520 in the buffer.
1521
1522 @defun overlay-recenter pos
1523 This function recenters the overlays of the current buffer around
1524 position @var{pos}. That makes overlay lookup faster for positions
1525 near @var{pos}, but slower for positions far away from @var{pos}.
1526 @end defun
1527
1528 A loop that scans the buffer forwards, creating overlays, can run
1529 faster if you do @code{(overlay-recenter (point-max))} first.
1530
1531 @node Overlay Properties
1532 @subsection Overlay Properties
1533 @cindex overlay properties
1534
1535 Overlay properties are like text properties in that the properties that
1536 alter how a character is displayed can come from either source. But in
1537 most respects they are different. @xref{Text Properties}, for comparison.
1538
1539 Text properties are considered a part of the text; overlays and
1540 their properties are specifically considered not to be part of the
1541 text. Thus, copying text between various buffers and strings
1542 preserves text properties, but does not try to preserve overlays.
1543 Changing a buffer's text properties marks the buffer as modified,
1544 while moving an overlay or changing its properties does not. Unlike
1545 text property changes, overlay property changes are not recorded in
1546 the buffer's undo list.
1547
1548 Since more than one overlay can specify a property value for the
1549 same character, Emacs lets you specify a priority value of each
1550 overlay. In case two overlays have the same priority value, and one
1551 is nested in the other, then the inner one will have priority over the
1552 outer one. If neither is nested in the other then you should not make
1553 assumptions about which overlay will prevail.
1554
1555 These functions read and set the properties of an overlay:
1556
1557 @defun overlay-get overlay prop
1558 This function returns the value of property @var{prop} recorded in
1559 @var{overlay}, if any. If @var{overlay} does not record any value for
1560 that property, but it does have a @code{category} property which is a
1561 symbol, that symbol's @var{prop} property is used. Otherwise, the value
1562 is @code{nil}.
1563 @end defun
1564
1565 @defun overlay-put overlay prop value
1566 This function sets the value of property @var{prop} recorded in
1567 @var{overlay} to @var{value}. It returns @var{value}.
1568 @end defun
1569
1570 @defun overlay-properties overlay
1571 This returns a copy of the property list of @var{overlay}.
1572 @end defun
1573
1574 See also the function @code{get-char-property} which checks both
1575 overlay properties and text properties for a given character.
1576 @xref{Examining Properties}.
1577
1578 Many overlay properties have special meanings; here is a table
1579 of them:
1580
1581 @table @code
1582 @item priority
1583 @kindex priority @r{(overlay property)}
1584 This property's value determines the priority of the overlay.
1585 If you want to specify a priority value, use either @code{nil}
1586 (or zero), or a positive integer. Any other value has undefined behavior.
1587
1588 The priority matters when two or more overlays cover the same
1589 character and both specify the same property; the one whose
1590 @code{priority} value is larger overrides the other. For the
1591 @code{face} property, the higher priority overlay's value does not
1592 completely override the other value; instead, its face attributes
1593 override the face attributes of the lower priority @code{face}
1594 property.
1595
1596 Currently, all overlays take priority over text properties.
1597
1598 Note that Emacs sometimes uses non-numeric priority values for some of
1599 its internal overlays, so do not try to do arithmetic on the
1600 priority of an overlay (unless it is one that you created). If you
1601 need to put overlays in priority order, use the @var{sorted} argument
1602 of @code{overlays-at}. @xref{Finding Overlays}.
1603
1604 @item window
1605 @kindex window @r{(overlay property)}
1606 If the @code{window} property is non-@code{nil}, then the overlay
1607 applies only on that window.
1608
1609 @item category
1610 @kindex category @r{(overlay property)}
1611 If an overlay has a @code{category} property, we call it the
1612 @dfn{category} of the overlay. It should be a symbol. The properties
1613 of the symbol serve as defaults for the properties of the overlay.
1614
1615 @item face
1616 @kindex face @r{(overlay property)}
1617 This property controls the appearance of the text (@pxref{Faces}).
1618 The value of the property can be the following:
1619
1620 @itemize @bullet
1621 @item
1622 A face name (a symbol or string).
1623
1624 @item
1625 An anonymous face: a property list of the form @code{(@var{keyword}
1626 @var{value} @dots{})}, where each @var{keyword} is a face attribute
1627 name and @var{value} is a value for that attribute.
1628
1629 @item
1630 A list of faces. Each list element should be either a face name or an
1631 anonymous face. This specifies a face which is an aggregate of the
1632 attributes of each of the listed faces. Faces occurring earlier in
1633 the list have higher priority.
1634
1635 @item
1636 A cons cell of the form @code{(foreground-color . @var{color-name})}
1637 or @code{(background-color . @var{color-name})}. This specifies the
1638 foreground or background color, similar to @code{(:foreground
1639 @var{color-name})} or @code{(:background @var{color-name})}. This
1640 form is supported for backward compatibility only, and should be
1641 avoided.
1642 @end itemize
1643
1644 @item mouse-face
1645 @kindex mouse-face @r{(overlay property)}
1646 This property is used instead of @code{face} when the mouse is within
1647 the range of the overlay. However, Emacs ignores all face attributes
1648 from this property that alter the text size (e.g., @code{:height},
1649 @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant}). Those attributes are always the
1650 same as in the unhighlighted text.
1651
1652 @item display
1653 @kindex display @r{(overlay property)}
1654 This property activates various features that change the
1655 way text is displayed. For example, it can make text appear taller
1656 or shorter, higher or lower, wider or narrower, or replaced with an image.
1657 @xref{Display Property}.
1658
1659 @item help-echo
1660 @kindex help-echo @r{(overlay property)}
1661 If an overlay has a @code{help-echo} property, then when you move the
1662 mouse onto the text in the overlay, Emacs displays a help string in the
1663 echo area, or in the tooltip window. For details see @ref{Text
1664 help-echo}.
1665
1666 @item field
1667 @kindex field @r{(overlay property)}
1668 @c Copied from Special Properties.
1669 Consecutive characters with the same @code{field} property constitute a
1670 @emph{field}. Some motion functions including @code{forward-word} and
1671 @code{beginning-of-line} stop moving at a field boundary.
1672 @xref{Fields}.
1673
1674 @item modification-hooks
1675 @kindex modification-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1676 This property's value is a list of functions to be called if any
1677 character within the overlay is changed or if text is inserted strictly
1678 within the overlay.
1679
1680 The hook functions are called both before and after each change.
1681 If the functions save the information they receive, and compare notes
1682 between calls, they can determine exactly what change has been made
1683 in the buffer text.
1684
1685 When called before a change, each function receives four arguments: the
1686 overlay, @code{nil}, and the beginning and end of the text range to be
1687 modified.
1688
1689 When called after a change, each function receives five arguments: the
1690 overlay, @code{t}, the beginning and end of the text range just
1691 modified, and the length of the pre-change text replaced by that range.
1692 (For an insertion, the pre-change length is zero; for a deletion, that
1693 length is the number of characters deleted, and the post-change
1694 beginning and end are equal.)
1695
1696 If these functions modify the buffer, they should bind
1697 @code{inhibit-modification-hooks} to @code{t} around doing so, to
1698 avoid confusing the internal mechanism that calls these hooks.
1699
1700 Text properties also support the @code{modification-hooks} property,
1701 but the details are somewhat different (@pxref{Special Properties}).
1702
1703 @item insert-in-front-hooks
1704 @kindex insert-in-front-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1705 This property's value is a list of functions to be called before and
1706 after inserting text right at the beginning of the overlay. The calling
1707 conventions are the same as for the @code{modification-hooks} functions.
1708
1709 @item insert-behind-hooks
1710 @kindex insert-behind-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1711 This property's value is a list of functions to be called before and
1712 after inserting text right at the end of the overlay. The calling
1713 conventions are the same as for the @code{modification-hooks} functions.
1714
1715 @item invisible
1716 @kindex invisible @r{(overlay property)}
1717 The @code{invisible} property can make the text in the overlay
1718 invisible, which means that it does not appear on the screen.
1719 @xref{Invisible Text}, for details.
1720
1721 @item intangible
1722 @kindex intangible @r{(overlay property)}
1723 The @code{intangible} property on an overlay works just like the
1724 @code{intangible} text property. It is obsolete. @xref{Special
1725 Properties}, for details.
1726
1727 @item isearch-open-invisible
1728 This property tells incremental search how to make an invisible overlay
1729 visible, permanently, if the final match overlaps it. @xref{Invisible
1730 Text}.
1731
1732 @item isearch-open-invisible-temporary
1733 This property tells incremental search how to make an invisible overlay
1734 visible, temporarily, during the search. @xref{Invisible Text}.
1735
1736 @item before-string
1737 @kindex before-string @r{(overlay property)}
1738 This property's value is a string to add to the display at the beginning
1739 of the overlay. The string does not appear in the buffer in any
1740 sense---only on the screen.
1741
1742 @item after-string
1743 @kindex after-string @r{(overlay property)}
1744 This property's value is a string to add to the display at the end of
1745 the overlay. The string does not appear in the buffer in any
1746 sense---only on the screen.
1747
1748 @item line-prefix
1749 This property specifies a display spec to prepend to each
1750 non-continuation line at display-time. @xref{Truncation}.
1751
1752 @item wrap-prefix
1753 This property specifies a display spec to prepend to each continuation
1754 line at display-time. @xref{Truncation}.
1755
1756 @item evaporate
1757 @kindex evaporate @r{(overlay property)}
1758 If this property is non-@code{nil}, the overlay is deleted automatically
1759 if it becomes empty (i.e., if its length becomes zero). If you give
1760 an empty overlay (@pxref{Managing Overlays, empty overlay}) a
1761 non-@code{nil} @code{evaporate} property, that deletes it immediately.
1762 Note that, unless an overlay has this property, it will not be deleted
1763 when the text between its starting and ending positions is deleted
1764 from the buffer.
1765
1766 @item keymap
1767 @cindex keymap of character (and overlays)
1768 @kindex keymap @r{(overlay property)}
1769 If this property is non-@code{nil}, it specifies a keymap for a portion of the
1770 text. This keymap is used when the character after point is within the
1771 overlay, and takes precedence over most other keymaps. @xref{Active Keymaps}.
1772
1773 @item local-map
1774 @kindex local-map @r{(overlay property)}
1775 The @code{local-map} property is similar to @code{keymap} but replaces the
1776 buffer's local map rather than augmenting existing keymaps. This also means it
1777 has lower precedence than minor mode keymaps.
1778 @end table
1779
1780 The @code{keymap} and @code{local-map} properties do not affect a
1781 string displayed by the @code{before-string}, @code{after-string}, or
1782 @code{display} properties. This is only relevant for mouse clicks and
1783 other mouse events that fall on the string, since point is never on
1784 the string. To bind special mouse events for the string, assign it a
1785 @code{keymap} or @code{local-map} text property. @xref{Special
1786 Properties}.
1787
1788 @node Finding Overlays
1789 @subsection Searching for Overlays
1790 @cindex searching for overlays
1791 @cindex overlays, searching for
1792
1793 @defun overlays-at pos &optional sorted
1794 This function returns a list of all the overlays that cover the character at
1795 position @var{pos} in the current buffer. If @var{sorted} is non-@code{nil},
1796 the list is in decreasing order of priority, otherwise it is in no particular
1797 order. An overlay contains position @var{pos} if it begins at or before
1798 @var{pos}, and ends after @var{pos}.
1799
1800 To illustrate usage, here is a Lisp function that returns a list of the
1801 overlays that specify property @var{prop} for the character at point:
1802
1803 @smallexample
1804 (defun find-overlays-specifying (prop)
1805 (let ((overlays (overlays-at (point)))
1806 found)
1807 (while overlays
1808 (let ((overlay (car overlays)))
1809 (if (overlay-get overlay prop)
1810 (setq found (cons overlay found))))
1811 (setq overlays (cdr overlays)))
1812 found))
1813 @end smallexample
1814 @end defun
1815
1816 @defun overlays-in beg end
1817 This function returns a list of the overlays that overlap the region
1818 @var{beg} through @var{end}. An overlay overlaps with a region if it
1819 contains one or more characters in the region; empty overlays
1820 (@pxref{Managing Overlays, empty overlay}) overlap if they are at
1821 @var{beg}, strictly between @var{beg} and @var{end}, or at @var{end}
1822 when @var{end} denotes the position at the end of the buffer.
1823 @end defun
1824
1825 @defun next-overlay-change pos
1826 This function returns the buffer position of the next beginning or end
1827 of an overlay, after @var{pos}. If there is none, it returns
1828 @code{(point-max)}.
1829 @end defun
1830
1831 @defun previous-overlay-change pos
1832 This function returns the buffer position of the previous beginning or
1833 end of an overlay, before @var{pos}. If there is none, it returns
1834 @code{(point-min)}.
1835 @end defun
1836
1837 As an example, here's a simplified (and inefficient) version of the
1838 primitive function @code{next-single-char-property-change}
1839 (@pxref{Property Search}). It searches forward from position
1840 @var{pos} for the next position where the value of a given property
1841 @code{prop}, as obtained from either overlays or text properties,
1842 changes.
1843
1844 @smallexample
1845 (defun next-single-char-property-change (position prop)
1846 (save-excursion
1847 (goto-char position)
1848 (let ((propval (get-char-property (point) prop)))
1849 (while (and (not (eobp))
1850 (eq (get-char-property (point) prop) propval))
1851 (goto-char (min (next-overlay-change (point))
1852 (next-single-property-change (point) prop)))))
1853 (point)))
1854 @end smallexample
1855
1856 @node Size of Displayed Text
1857 @section Size of Displayed Text
1858 @cindex size of text on display
1859 @cindex character width on display
1860
1861 Since not all characters have the same width, these functions let you
1862 check the width of a character. @xref{Primitive Indent}, and
1863 @ref{Screen Lines}, for related functions.
1864
1865 @defun char-width char
1866 This function returns the width in columns of the character
1867 @var{char}, if it were displayed in the current buffer (i.e., taking
1868 into account the buffer's display table, if any; @pxref{Display
1869 Tables}). The width of a tab character is usually @code{tab-width}
1870 (@pxref{Usual Display}).
1871 @end defun
1872
1873 @defun string-width string
1874 This function returns the width in columns of the string @var{string},
1875 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
1876 @end defun
1877
1878 @defun truncate-string-to-width string width &optional start-column padding ellipsis
1879 This function returns the part of @var{string} that fits within
1880 @var{width} columns, as a new string.
1881
1882 If @var{string} does not reach @var{width}, then the result ends where
1883 @var{string} ends. If one multi-column character in @var{string}
1884 extends across the column @var{width}, that character is not included in
1885 the result. Thus, the result can fall short of @var{width} but cannot
1886 go beyond it.
1887
1888 The optional argument @var{start-column} specifies the starting column.
1889 If this is non-@code{nil}, then the first @var{start-column} columns of
1890 the string are omitted from the value. If one multi-column character in
1891 @var{string} extends across the column @var{start-column}, that
1892 character is not included.
1893
1894 The optional argument @var{padding}, if non-@code{nil}, is a padding
1895 character added at the beginning and end of the result string, to extend
1896 it to exactly @var{width} columns. The padding character is used at the
1897 end of the result if it falls short of @var{width}. It is also used at
1898 the beginning of the result if one multi-column character in
1899 @var{string} extends across the column @var{start-column}.
1900
1901 @vindex truncate-string-ellipsis
1902 If @var{ellipsis} is non-@code{nil}, it should be a string which will
1903 replace the end of @var{string} (including any padding) if it extends
1904 beyond @var{width}, unless the display width of @var{string} is equal
1905 to or less than the display width of @var{ellipsis}. If
1906 @var{ellipsis} is non-@code{nil} and not a string, it stands for
1907 the value of the variable @code{truncate-string-ellipsis}.
1908
1909 @example
1910 (truncate-string-to-width "\tab\t" 12 4)
1911 @result{} "ab"
1912 (truncate-string-to-width "\tab\t" 12 4 ?\s)
1913 @result{} " ab "
1914 @end example
1915 @end defun
1916
1917 The following function returns the size in pixels of text as if it were
1918 displayed in a given window. This function is used by
1919 @code{fit-window-to-buffer} and @code{fit-frame-to-buffer}
1920 (@pxref{Resizing Windows}) to make a window exactly as large as the text
1921 it contains.
1922
1923 @defun window-text-pixel-size &optional window from to x-limit y-limit mode-and-header-line
1924 This function returns the size of the text of @var{window}'s buffer in
1925 pixels. @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected
1926 one. The return value is a cons of the maximum pixel-width of any text
1927 line and the maximum pixel-height of all text lines.
1928
1929 The optional argument @var{from}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the first
1930 text position to consider and defaults to the minimum accessible
1931 position of the buffer. If @var{from} is @code{t}, it uses the minimum
1932 accessible position that is not a newline character. The optional
1933 argument @var{to}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the last text position
1934 to consider and defaults to the maximum accessible position of the
1935 buffer. If @var{to} is @code{t}, it uses the maximum accessible
1936 position that is not a newline character.
1937
1938 The optional argument @var{x-limit}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
1939 maximum pixel-width that can be returned. @var{x-limit} @code{nil} or
1940 omitted, means to use the pixel-width of @var{window}'s body
1941 (@pxref{Window Sizes}); this is useful when the caller does not intend
1942 to change the width of @var{window}. Otherwise, the caller should
1943 specify here the maximum width @var{window}'s body may assume. Text
1944 whose x-coordinate is beyond @var{x-limit} is ignored. Since
1945 calculating the width of long lines can take some time, it's always a
1946 good idea to make this argument as small as needed; in particular, if
1947 the buffer might contain long lines that will be truncated anyway.
1948
1949 The optional argument @var{y-limit}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
1950 maximum pixel-height that can be returned. Text lines whose
1951 y-coordinate is beyond @var{y-limit} are ignored. Since calculating the
1952 pixel-height of a large buffer can take some time, it makes sense to
1953 specify this argument; in particular, if the caller does not know the
1954 size of the buffer.
1955
1956 The optional argument @var{mode-and-header-line} @code{nil} or omitted
1957 means to not include the height of the mode- or header-line of
1958 @var{window} in the return value. If it is either the symbol
1959 @code{mode-line} or @code{header-line}, include only the height of that
1960 line, if present, in the return value. If it is @code{t}, include the
1961 height of both, if present, in the return value.
1962 @end defun
1963
1964
1965 @node Line Height
1966 @section Line Height
1967 @cindex line height
1968 @cindex height of a line
1969
1970 The total height of each display line consists of the height of the
1971 contents of the line, plus optional additional vertical line spacing
1972 above or below the display line.
1973
1974 The height of the line contents is the maximum height of any character
1975 or image on that display line, including the final newline if there is
1976 one. (A display line that is continued doesn't include a final
1977 newline.) That is the default line height, if you do nothing to specify
1978 a greater height. (In the most common case, this equals the height of
1979 the corresponding frame's default font, see @ref{Frame Font}.)
1980
1981 There are several ways to explicitly specify a larger line height,
1982 either by specifying an absolute height for the display line, or by
1983 specifying vertical space. However, no matter what you specify, the
1984 actual line height can never be less than the default.
1985
1986 @kindex line-height @r{(text property)}
1987 A newline can have a @code{line-height} text or overlay property
1988 that controls the total height of the display line ending in that
1989 newline.
1990
1991 If the property value is @code{t}, the newline character has no
1992 effect on the displayed height of the line---the visible contents
1993 alone determine the height. This is useful for tiling small images
1994 (or image slices) without adding blank areas between the images.
1995
1996 If the property value is a list of the form @code{(@var{height}
1997 @var{total})}, that adds extra space @emph{below} the display line.
1998 First Emacs uses @var{height} as a height spec to control extra space
1999 @emph{above} the line; then it adds enough space @emph{below} the line
2000 to bring the total line height up to @var{total}. In this case, the
2001 other ways to specify the line spacing are ignored.
2002
2003 @cindex height spec
2004 Any other kind of property value is a height spec, which translates
2005 into a number---the specified line height. There are several ways to
2006 write a height spec; here's how each of them translates into a number:
2007
2008 @table @code
2009 @item @var{integer}
2010 If the height spec is a positive integer, the height value is that integer.
2011 @item @var{float}
2012 If the height spec is a float, @var{float}, the numeric height value
2013 is @var{float} times the frame's default line height.
2014 @item (@var{face} . @var{ratio})
2015 If the height spec is a cons of the format shown, the numeric height
2016 is @var{ratio} times the height of face @var{face}. @var{ratio} can
2017 be any type of number, or @code{nil} which means a ratio of 1.
2018 If @var{face} is @code{t}, it refers to the current face.
2019 @item (nil . @var{ratio})
2020 If the height spec is a cons of the format shown, the numeric height
2021 is @var{ratio} times the height of the contents of the line.
2022 @end table
2023
2024 Thus, any valid height spec determines the height in pixels, one way
2025 or another. If the line contents' height is less than that, Emacs
2026 adds extra vertical space above the line to achieve the specified
2027 total height.
2028
2029 If you don't specify the @code{line-height} property, the line's
2030 height consists of the contents' height plus the line spacing.
2031 There are several ways to specify the line spacing for different
2032 parts of Emacs text.
2033
2034 On graphical terminals, you can specify the line spacing for all
2035 lines in a frame, using the @code{line-spacing} frame parameter
2036 (@pxref{Layout Parameters}). However, if the default value of
2037 @code{line-spacing} is non-@code{nil}, it overrides the
2038 frame's @code{line-spacing} parameter. An integer specifies the
2039 number of pixels put below lines. A floating-point number specifies
2040 the spacing relative to the frame's default line height.
2041
2042 @vindex line-spacing
2043 You can specify the line spacing for all lines in a buffer via the
2044 buffer-local @code{line-spacing} variable. An integer specifies
2045 the number of pixels put below lines. A floating-point number
2046 specifies the spacing relative to the default frame line height. This
2047 overrides line spacings specified for the frame.
2048
2049 @kindex line-spacing @r{(text property)}
2050 Finally, a newline can have a @code{line-spacing} text or overlay
2051 property that overrides the default frame line spacing and the buffer
2052 local @code{line-spacing} variable, for the display line ending in
2053 that newline.
2054
2055 One way or another, these mechanisms specify a Lisp value for the
2056 spacing of each line. The value is a height spec, and it translates
2057 into a Lisp value as described above. However, in this case the
2058 numeric height value specifies the line spacing, rather than the line
2059 height.
2060
2061 On text terminals, the line spacing cannot be altered.
2062
2063 @node Faces
2064 @section Faces
2065 @cindex faces
2066
2067 A @dfn{face} is a collection of graphical attributes for displaying
2068 text: font, foreground color, background color, optional underlining,
2069 etc. Faces control how Emacs displays text in buffers, as well as
2070 other parts of the frame such as the mode line.
2071
2072 @cindex anonymous face
2073 One way to represent a face is as a property list of attributes,
2074 like @code{(:foreground "red" :weight bold)}. Such a list is called
2075 an @dfn{anonymous face}. For example, you can assign an anonymous
2076 face as the value of the @code{face} text property, and Emacs will
2077 display the underlying text with the specified attributes.
2078 @xref{Special Properties}.
2079
2080 @cindex face name
2081 More commonly, a face is referred to via a @dfn{face name}: a Lisp
2082 symbol associated with a set of face attributes@footnote{For backward
2083 compatibility, you can also use a string to specify a face name; that
2084 is equivalent to a Lisp symbol with the same name.}. Named faces are
2085 defined using the @code{defface} macro (@pxref{Defining Faces}).
2086 Emacs comes with several standard named faces (@pxref{Basic Faces}).
2087
2088 Many parts of Emacs required named faces, and do not accept
2089 anonymous faces. These include the functions documented in
2090 @ref{Attribute Functions}, and the variable @code{font-lock-keywords}
2091 (@pxref{Search-based Fontification}). Unless otherwise stated, we
2092 will use the term @dfn{face} to refer only to named faces.
2093
2094 @defun facep object
2095 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if @var{object} is a
2096 named face: a Lisp symbol or string which serves as a face name.
2097 Otherwise, it returns @code{nil}.
2098 @end defun
2099
2100 @menu
2101 * Face Attributes:: What is in a face?
2102 * Defining Faces:: How to define a face.
2103 * Attribute Functions:: Functions to examine and set face attributes.
2104 * Displaying Faces:: How Emacs combines the faces specified for a character.
2105 * Face Remapping:: Remapping faces to alternative definitions.
2106 * Face Functions:: How to define and examine faces.
2107 * Auto Faces:: Hook for automatic face assignment.
2108 * Basic Faces:: Faces that are defined by default.
2109 * Font Selection:: Finding the best available font for a face.
2110 * Font Lookup:: Looking up the names of available fonts
2111 and information about them.
2112 * Fontsets:: A fontset is a collection of fonts
2113 that handle a range of character sets.
2114 * Low-Level Font:: Lisp representation for character display fonts.
2115 @end menu
2116
2117 @node Face Attributes
2118 @subsection Face Attributes
2119 @cindex face attributes
2120
2121 @dfn{Face attributes} determine the visual appearance of a face.
2122 The following table lists all the face attributes, their possible
2123 values, and their effects.
2124
2125 Apart from the values given below, each face attribute can have the
2126 value @code{unspecified}. This special value means that the face
2127 doesn't specify that attribute directly. An @code{unspecified}
2128 attribute tells Emacs to refer instead to a parent face (see the
2129 description @code{:inherit} attribute below); or, failing that, to an
2130 underlying face (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). The @code{default} face
2131 must specify all attributes.
2132
2133 Some of these attributes are meaningful only on certain kinds of
2134 displays. If your display cannot handle a certain attribute, the
2135 attribute is ignored.
2136
2137 @table @code
2138 @item :family
2139 Font family or fontset (a string). @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU
2140 Emacs Manual}, for more information about font families. The function
2141 @code{font-family-list} (see below) returns a list of available family
2142 names. @xref{Fontsets}, for information about fontsets.
2143
2144 @item :foundry
2145 The name of the @dfn{font foundry} for the font family specified by
2146 the @code{:family} attribute (a string). @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The
2147 GNU Emacs Manual}.
2148
2149 @item :width
2150 Relative character width. This should be one of the symbols
2151 @code{ultra-condensed}, @code{extra-condensed}, @code{condensed},
2152 @code{semi-condensed}, @code{normal}, @code{semi-expanded},
2153 @code{expanded}, @code{extra-expanded}, or @code{ultra-expanded}.
2154
2155 @item :height
2156 The height of the font. In the simplest case, this is an integer in
2157 units of 1/10 point.
2158
2159 The value can also be floating point or a function, which
2160 specifies the height relative to an @dfn{underlying face}
2161 (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). A floating-point value
2162 specifies the amount by which to scale the height of the
2163 underlying face. A function value is called
2164 with one argument, the height of the underlying face, and returns the
2165 height of the new face. If the function is passed an integer
2166 argument, it must return an integer.
2167
2168 The height of the default face must be specified using an integer;
2169 floating point and function values are not allowed.
2170
2171 @item :weight
2172 Font weight---one of the symbols (from densest to faintest)
2173 @code{ultra-bold}, @code{extra-bold}, @code{bold}, @code{semi-bold},
2174 @code{normal}, @code{semi-light}, @code{light}, @code{extra-light}, or
2175 @code{ultra-light}. On text terminals which support
2176 variable-brightness text, any weight greater than normal is displayed
2177 as extra bright, and any weight less than normal is displayed as
2178 half-bright.
2179
2180 @cindex italic text
2181 @item :slant
2182 Font slant---one of the symbols @code{italic}, @code{oblique},
2183 @code{normal}, @code{reverse-italic}, or @code{reverse-oblique}. On
2184 text terminals that support variable-brightness text, slanted text is
2185 displayed as half-bright.
2186
2187 @item :foreground
2188 Foreground color, a string. The value can be a system-defined color
2189 name, or a hexadecimal color specification. @xref{Color Names}. On
2190 black-and-white displays, certain shades of gray are implemented by
2191 stipple patterns.
2192
2193 @item :distant-foreground
2194 Alternative foreground color, a string. This is like @code{:foreground}
2195 but the color is only used as a foreground when the background color is
2196 near to the foreground that would have been used. This is useful for
2197 example when marking text (i.e., the region face). If the text has a foreground
2198 that is visible with the region face, that foreground is used.
2199 If the foreground is near the region face background,
2200 @code{:distant-foreground} is used instead so the text is readable.
2201
2202 @item :background
2203 Background color, a string. The value can be a system-defined color
2204 name, or a hexadecimal color specification. @xref{Color Names}.
2205
2206 @cindex underlined text
2207 @item :underline
2208 Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what
2209 way. The possible values of the @code{:underline} attribute are:
2210
2211 @table @asis
2212 @item @code{nil}
2213 Don't underline.
2214
2215 @item @code{t}
2216 Underline with the foreground color of the face.
2217
2218 @item @var{color}
2219 Underline in color @var{color}, a string specifying a color.
2220
2221 @item @code{(:color @var{color} :style @var{style})}
2222 @var{color} is either a string, or the symbol @code{foreground-color},
2223 meaning the foreground color of the face. Omitting the attribute
2224 @code{:color} means to use the foreground color of the face.
2225 @var{style} should be a symbol @code{line} or @code{wave}, meaning to
2226 use a straight or wavy line. Omitting the attribute @code{:style}
2227 means to use a straight line.
2228 @end table
2229
2230 @cindex overlined text
2231 @item :overline
2232 Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2233 If the value is @code{t}, overlining uses the foreground color of the
2234 face. If the value is a string, overlining uses that color. The
2235 value @code{nil} means do not overline.
2236
2237 @cindex strike-through text
2238 @item :strike-through
2239 Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2240 color. The value is used like that of @code{:overline}.
2241
2242 @cindex 2D box
2243 @cindex 3D box
2244 @item :box
2245 Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its color, the
2246 width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. Here are the possible
2247 values of the @code{:box} attribute, and what they mean:
2248
2249 @table @asis
2250 @item @code{nil}
2251 Don't draw a box.
2252
2253 @item @code{t}
2254 Draw a box with lines of width 1, in the foreground color.
2255
2256 @item @var{color}
2257 Draw a box with lines of width 1, in color @var{color}.
2258
2259 @item @code{(:line-width @var{width} :color @var{color} :style @var{style})}
2260 This way you can explicitly specify all aspects of the box. The value
2261 @var{width} specifies the width of the lines to draw; it defaults to
2262 1. A negative width @var{-n} means to draw a line of width @var{n}
2263 that occupies the space of the underlying text, thus avoiding any
2264 increase in the character height or width.
2265
2266 The value @var{color} specifies the color to draw with. The default is
2267 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2268 color of the face for 3D boxes.
2269
2270 The value @var{style} specifies whether to draw a 3D box. If it is
2271 @code{released-button}, the box looks like a 3D button that is not being
2272 pressed. If it is @code{pressed-button}, the box looks like a 3D button
2273 that is being pressed. If it is @code{nil} or omitted, a plain 2D box
2274 is used.
2275 @end table
2276
2277 @item :inverse-video
2278 Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. The
2279 value should be @code{t} (yes) or @code{nil} (no).
2280
2281 @item :stipple
2282 The background stipple, a bitmap.
2283
2284 The value can be a string; that should be the name of a file containing
2285 external-format X bitmap data. The file is found in the directories
2286 listed in the variable @code{x-bitmap-file-path}.
2287
2288 Alternatively, the value can specify the bitmap directly, with a list
2289 of the form @code{(@var{width} @var{height} @var{data})}. Here,
2290 @var{width} and @var{height} specify the size in pixels, and
2291 @var{data} is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap, row by
2292 row. Each row occupies @math{(@var{width} + 7) / 8} consecutive bytes
2293 in the string (which should be a unibyte string for best results).
2294 This means that each row always occupies at least one whole byte.
2295
2296 If the value is @code{nil}, that means use no stipple pattern.
2297
2298 Normally you do not need to set the stipple attribute, because it is
2299 used automatically to handle certain shades of gray.
2300
2301 @item :font
2302 The font used to display the face. Its value should be a font object.
2303 @xref{Low-Level Font}, for information about font objects, font specs,
2304 and font entities.
2305
2306 When specifying this attribute using @code{set-face-attribute}
2307 (@pxref{Attribute Functions}), you may also supply a font spec, a font
2308 entity, or a string. Emacs converts such values to an appropriate
2309 font object, and stores that font object as the actual attribute
2310 value. If you specify a string, the contents of the string should be
2311 a font name (@pxref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}); if the
2312 font name is an XLFD containing wildcards, Emacs chooses the first
2313 font matching those wildcards. Specifying this attribute also changes
2314 the values of the @code{:family}, @code{:foundry}, @code{:width},
2315 @code{:height}, @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant} attributes.
2316
2317 @cindex inheritance, for faces
2318 @item :inherit
2319 The name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list of face
2320 names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face like
2321 an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying
2322 faces (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). If a list of faces is used,
2323 attributes from faces earlier in the list override those from later
2324 faces.
2325 @end table
2326
2327 @defun font-family-list &optional frame
2328 This function returns a list of available font family names. The
2329 optional argument @var{frame} specifies the frame on which the text is
2330 to be displayed; if it is @code{nil}, the selected frame is used.
2331 @end defun
2332
2333 @defopt underline-minimum-offset
2334 This variable specifies the minimum distance between the baseline and
2335 the underline, in pixels, when displaying underlined text.
2336 @end defopt
2337
2338 @defopt x-bitmap-file-path
2339 This variable specifies a list of directories for searching
2340 for bitmap files, for the @code{:stipple} attribute.
2341 @end defopt
2342
2343 @defun bitmap-spec-p object
2344 This returns @code{t} if @var{object} is a valid bitmap specification,
2345 suitable for use with @code{:stipple} (see above). It returns
2346 @code{nil} otherwise.
2347 @end defun
2348
2349 @node Defining Faces
2350 @subsection Defining Faces
2351 @cindex defining faces
2352
2353 @cindex face spec
2354 The usual way to define a face is through the @code{defface} macro.
2355 This macro associates a face name (a symbol) with a default @dfn{face
2356 spec}. A face spec is a construct which specifies what attributes a
2357 face should have on any given terminal; for example, a face spec might
2358 specify one foreground color on high-color terminals, and a different
2359 foreground color on low-color terminals.
2360
2361 People are sometimes tempted to create a variable whose value is a
2362 face name. In the vast majority of cases, this is not necessary; the
2363 usual procedure is to define a face with @code{defface}, and then use
2364 its name directly.
2365
2366 @defmac defface face spec doc [keyword value]@dots{}
2367 This macro declares @var{face} as a named face whose default face spec
2368 is given by @var{spec}. You should not quote the symbol @var{face},
2369 and it should not end in @samp{-face} (that would be redundant). The
2370 argument @var{doc} is a documentation string for the face. The
2371 additional @var{keyword} arguments have the same meanings as in
2372 @code{defgroup} and @code{defcustom} (@pxref{Common Keywords}).
2373
2374 If @var{face} already has a default face spec, this macro does
2375 nothing.
2376
2377 The default face spec determines @var{face}'s appearance when no
2378 customizations are in effect (@pxref{Customization}). If @var{face}
2379 has already been customized (via Custom themes or via customizations
2380 read from the init file), its appearance is determined by the custom
2381 face spec(s), which override the default face spec @var{spec}.
2382 However, if the customizations are subsequently removed, the
2383 appearance of @var{face} will again be determined by its default face
2384 spec.
2385
2386 As an exception, if you evaluate a @code{defface} form with
2387 @kbd{C-M-x} in Emacs Lisp mode (@code{eval-defun}), a special feature
2388 of @code{eval-defun} overrides any custom face specs on the face,
2389 causing the face to reflect exactly what the @code{defface} says.
2390
2391 The @var{spec} argument is a @dfn{face spec}, which states how the
2392 face should appear on different kinds of terminals. It should be an
2393 alist whose elements each have the form
2394
2395 @example
2396 (@var{display} . @var{plist})
2397 @end example
2398
2399 @noindent
2400 @var{display} specifies a class of terminals (see below). @var{plist}
2401 is a property list of face attributes and their values, specifying how
2402 the face appears on such terminals. For backward compatibility, you
2403 can also write an element as @code{(@var{display} @var{plist})}.
2404
2405 The @var{display} part of an element of @var{spec} determines which
2406 terminals the element matches. If more than one element of @var{spec}
2407 matches a given terminal, the first element that matches is the one
2408 used for that terminal. There are three possibilities for
2409 @var{display}:
2410
2411 @table @asis
2412 @item @code{default}
2413 This element of @var{spec} doesn't match any terminal; instead, it
2414 specifies defaults that apply to all terminals. This element, if
2415 used, must be the first element of @var{spec}. Each of the following
2416 elements can override any or all of these defaults.
2417
2418 @item @code{t}
2419 This element of @var{spec} matches all terminals. Therefore, any
2420 subsequent elements of @var{spec} are never used. Normally @code{t}
2421 is used in the last (or only) element of @var{spec}.
2422
2423 @item a list
2424 If @var{display} is a list, each element should have the form
2425 @code{(@var{characteristic} @var{value}@dots{})}. Here
2426 @var{characteristic} specifies a way of classifying terminals, and the
2427 @var{value}s are possible classifications which @var{display} should
2428 apply to. Here are the possible values of @var{characteristic}:
2429
2430 @table @code
2431 @item type
2432 The kind of window system the terminal uses---either @code{graphic}
2433 (any graphics-capable display), @code{x}, @code{pc} (for the MS-DOS
2434 console), @code{w32} (for MS Windows 9X/NT/2K/XP), or @code{tty} (a
2435 non-graphics-capable display). @xref{Window Systems, window-system}.
2436
2437 @item class
2438 What kinds of colors the terminal supports---either @code{color},
2439 @code{grayscale}, or @code{mono}.
2440
2441 @item background
2442 The kind of background---either @code{light} or @code{dark}.
2443
2444 @item min-colors
2445 An integer that represents the minimum number of colors the terminal
2446 should support. This matches a terminal if its
2447 @code{display-color-cells} value is at least the specified integer.
2448
2449 @item supports
2450 Whether or not the terminal can display the face attributes given in
2451 @var{value}@dots{} (@pxref{Face Attributes}). @xref{Display Face
2452 Attribute Testing}, for more information on exactly how this testing
2453 is done.
2454 @end table
2455
2456 If an element of @var{display} specifies more than one @var{value} for
2457 a given @var{characteristic}, any of those values is acceptable. If
2458 @var{display} has more than one element, each element should specify a
2459 different @var{characteristic}; then @emph{each} characteristic of the
2460 terminal must match one of the @var{value}s specified for it in
2461 @var{display}.
2462 @end table
2463 @end defmac
2464
2465 For example, here's the definition of the standard face
2466 @code{highlight}:
2467
2468 @example
2469 (defface highlight
2470 '((((class color) (min-colors 88) (background light))
2471 :background "darkseagreen2")
2472 (((class color) (min-colors 88) (background dark))
2473 :background "darkolivegreen")
2474 (((class color) (min-colors 16) (background light))
2475 :background "darkseagreen2")
2476 (((class color) (min-colors 16) (background dark))
2477 :background "darkolivegreen")
2478 (((class color) (min-colors 8))
2479 :background "green" :foreground "black")
2480 (t :inverse-video t))
2481 "Basic face for highlighting."
2482 :group 'basic-faces)
2483 @end example
2484
2485 Internally, Emacs stores each face's default spec in its
2486 @code{face-defface-spec} symbol property (@pxref{Symbol Properties}).
2487 The @code{saved-face} property stores any face spec saved by the user
2488 using the customization buffer; the @code{customized-face} property
2489 stores the face spec customized for the current session, but not
2490 saved; and the @code{theme-face} property stores an alist associating
2491 the active customization settings and Custom themes with the face
2492 specs for that face. The face's documentation string is stored in the
2493 @code{face-documentation} property.
2494
2495 Normally, a face is declared just once, using @code{defface}, and
2496 any further changes to its appearance are applied using the Customize
2497 framework (e.g., via the Customize user interface or via the
2498 @code{custom-set-faces} function; @pxref{Applying Customizations}), or
2499 by face remapping (@pxref{Face Remapping}). In the rare event that
2500 you need to change a face spec directly from Lisp, you can use the
2501 @code{face-spec-set} function.
2502
2503 @defun face-spec-set face spec &optional spec-type
2504 This function applies @var{spec} as a face spec for @code{face}.
2505 @var{spec} should be a face spec, as described in the above
2506 documentation for @code{defface}.
2507
2508 This function also defines @var{face} as a valid face name if it is
2509 not already one, and (re)calculates its attributes on existing frames.
2510
2511 @cindex override spec @r{(for a face)}
2512 The argument @var{spec-type} determines which spec to set. If it is
2513 @code{nil} or @code{face-override-spec}, this function sets the
2514 @dfn{override spec}, which overrides over all other face specs on
2515 @var{face}. If it is @code{customized-face} or @code{saved-face},
2516 this function sets the customized spec or the saved custom spec. If
2517 it is @code{face-defface-spec}, this function sets the default face
2518 spec (the same one set by @code{defface}). If it is @code{reset},
2519 this function clears out all customization specs and override specs
2520 from @var{face} (in this case, the value of @var{spec} is ignored).
2521 Any other value of @var{spec-type} is reserved for internal use.
2522 @end defun
2523
2524 @node Attribute Functions
2525 @subsection Face Attribute Functions
2526 @cindex face attributes, access and modification
2527
2528 This section describes functions for directly accessing and
2529 modifying the attributes of a named face.
2530
2531 @defun face-attribute face attribute &optional frame inherit
2532 This function returns the value of the @var{attribute} attribute for
2533 @var{face} on @var{frame}.
2534
2535 If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, that means the selected frame
2536 (@pxref{Input Focus}). If @var{frame} is @code{t}, this function
2537 returns the value of the specified attribute for newly-created frames
2538 (this is normally @code{unspecified}, unless you have specified some
2539 value using @code{set-face-attribute}; see below).
2540
2541 If @var{inherit} is @code{nil}, only attributes directly defined by
2542 @var{face} are considered, so the return value may be
2543 @code{unspecified}, or a relative value. If @var{inherit} is
2544 non-@code{nil}, @var{face}'s definition of @var{attribute} is merged
2545 with the faces specified by its @code{:inherit} attribute; however the
2546 return value may still be @code{unspecified} or relative. If
2547 @var{inherit} is a face or a list of faces, then the result is further
2548 merged with that face (or faces), until it becomes specified and
2549 absolute.
2550
2551 To ensure that the return value is always specified and absolute, use
2552 a value of @code{default} for @var{inherit}; this will resolve any
2553 unspecified or relative values by merging with the @code{default} face
2554 (which is always completely specified).
2555
2556 For example,
2557
2558 @example
2559 (face-attribute 'bold :weight)
2560 @result{} bold
2561 @end example
2562 @end defun
2563
2564 @c FIXME: Add an index for "relative face attribute", maybe here? --xfq
2565 @defun face-attribute-relative-p attribute value
2566 This function returns non-@code{nil} if @var{value}, when used as the
2567 value of the face attribute @var{attribute}, is relative. This means
2568 it would modify, rather than completely override, any value that comes
2569 from a subsequent face in the face list or that is inherited from
2570 another face.
2571
2572 @code{unspecified} is a relative value for all attributes. For
2573 @code{:height}, floating point and function values are also relative.
2574
2575 For example:
2576
2577 @example
2578 (face-attribute-relative-p :height 2.0)
2579 @result{} t
2580 @end example
2581 @end defun
2582
2583 @defun face-all-attributes face &optional frame
2584 This function returns an alist of attributes of @var{face}. The
2585 elements of the result are name-value pairs of the form
2586 @w{@code{(@var{attr-name} . @var{attr-value})}}. Optional argument
2587 @var{frame} specifies the frame whose definition of @var{face} to
2588 return; if omitted or @code{nil}, the returned value describes the
2589 default attributes of @var{face} for newly created frames.
2590 @end defun
2591
2592 @defun merge-face-attribute attribute value1 value2
2593 If @var{value1} is a relative value for the face attribute
2594 @var{attribute}, returns it merged with the underlying value
2595 @var{value2}; otherwise, if @var{value1} is an absolute value for the
2596 face attribute @var{attribute}, returns @var{value1} unchanged.
2597 @end defun
2598
2599 Normally, Emacs uses the face specs of each face to automatically
2600 calculate its attributes on each frame (@pxref{Defining Faces}). The
2601 function @code{set-face-attribute} can override this calculation by
2602 directly assigning attributes to a face, either on a specific frame or
2603 for all frames. This function is mostly intended for internal usage.
2604
2605 @defun set-face-attribute face frame &rest arguments
2606 This function sets one or more attributes of @var{face} for
2607 @var{frame}. The attributes specifies in this way override the face
2608 spec(s) belonging to @var{face}.
2609
2610 The extra arguments @var{arguments} specify the attributes to set, and
2611 the values for them. They should consist of alternating attribute
2612 names (such as @code{:family} or @code{:underline}) and values. Thus,
2613
2614 @example
2615 (set-face-attribute 'foo nil :weight 'bold :slant 'italic)
2616 @end example
2617
2618 @noindent
2619 sets the attribute @code{:weight} to @code{bold} and the attribute
2620 @code{:slant} to @code{italic}.
2621
2622
2623 If @var{frame} is @code{t}, this function sets the default attributes
2624 for newly created frames. If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, this function
2625 sets the attributes for all existing frames, as well as for newly
2626 created frames.
2627 @end defun
2628
2629 The following commands and functions mostly provide compatibility
2630 with old versions of Emacs. They work by calling
2631 @code{set-face-attribute}. Values of @code{t} and @code{nil} for
2632 their @var{frame} argument are handled just like
2633 @code{set-face-attribute} and @code{face-attribute}. The commands
2634 read their arguments using the minibuffer, if called interactively.
2635
2636 @deffn Command set-face-foreground face color &optional frame
2637 @deffnx Command set-face-background face color &optional frame
2638 These set the @code{:foreground} attribute (or @code{:background}
2639 attribute, respectively) of @var{face} to @var{color}.
2640 @end deffn
2641
2642 @deffn Command set-face-stipple face pattern &optional frame
2643 This sets the @code{:stipple} attribute of @var{face} to
2644 @var{pattern}.
2645 @end deffn
2646
2647 @deffn Command set-face-font face font &optional frame
2648 This sets the @code{:font} attribute of @var{face} to @var{font}.
2649 @end deffn
2650
2651 @defun set-face-bold face bold-p &optional frame
2652 This sets the @code{:weight} attribute of @var{face} to @var{normal}
2653 if @var{bold-p} is @code{nil}, and to @var{bold} otherwise.
2654 @end defun
2655
2656 @defun set-face-italic face italic-p &optional frame
2657 This sets the @code{:slant} attribute of @var{face} to @var{normal} if
2658 @var{italic-p} is @code{nil}, and to @var{italic} otherwise.
2659 @end defun
2660
2661 @defun set-face-underline face underline &optional frame
2662 This sets the @code{:underline} attribute of @var{face} to
2663 @var{underline}.
2664 @end defun
2665
2666 @defun set-face-inverse-video face inverse-video-p &optional frame
2667 This sets the @code{:inverse-video} attribute of @var{face} to
2668 @var{inverse-video-p}.
2669 @end defun
2670
2671 @deffn Command invert-face face &optional frame
2672 This swaps the foreground and background colors of face @var{face}.
2673 @end deffn
2674
2675 The following functions examine the attributes of a face. They
2676 mostly provide compatibility with old versions of Emacs. If you don't
2677 specify @var{frame}, they refer to the selected frame; @code{t} refers
2678 to the default data for new frames. They return @code{unspecified} if
2679 the face doesn't define any value for that attribute. If
2680 @var{inherit} is @code{nil}, only an attribute directly defined by the
2681 face is returned. If @var{inherit} is non-@code{nil}, any faces
2682 specified by its @code{:inherit} attribute are considered as well, and
2683 if @var{inherit} is a face or a list of faces, then they are also
2684 considered, until a specified attribute is found. To ensure that the
2685 return value is always specified, use a value of @code{default} for
2686 @var{inherit}.
2687
2688 @defun face-font face &optional frame
2689 This function returns the name of the font of face @var{face}.
2690 @end defun
2691
2692 @defun face-foreground face &optional frame inherit
2693 @defunx face-background face &optional frame inherit
2694 These functions return the foreground color (or background color,
2695 respectively) of face @var{face}, as a string.
2696 @end defun
2697
2698 @defun face-stipple face &optional frame inherit
2699 This function returns the name of the background stipple pattern of face
2700 @var{face}, or @code{nil} if it doesn't have one.
2701 @end defun
2702
2703 @defun face-bold-p face &optional frame inherit
2704 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if the @code{:weight}
2705 attribute of @var{face} is bolder than normal (i.e., one of
2706 @code{semi-bold}, @code{bold}, @code{extra-bold}, or
2707 @code{ultra-bold}). Otherwise, it returns @code{nil}.
2708 @end defun
2709
2710 @defun face-italic-p face &optional frame inherit
2711 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if the @code{:slant}
2712 attribute of @var{face} is @code{italic} or @code{oblique}, and
2713 @code{nil} otherwise.
2714 @end defun
2715
2716 @defun face-underline-p face &optional frame inherit
2717 This function returns non-@code{nil} if face @var{face} specifies
2718 a non-@code{nil} @code{:underline} attribute.
2719 @end defun
2720
2721 @defun face-inverse-video-p face &optional frame inherit
2722 This function returns non-@code{nil} if face @var{face} specifies
2723 a non-@code{nil} @code{:inverse-video} attribute.
2724 @end defun
2725
2726 @node Displaying Faces
2727 @subsection Displaying Faces
2728 @cindex displaying faces
2729 @cindex face merging
2730
2731 When Emacs displays a given piece of text, the visual appearance of
2732 the text may be determined by faces drawn from different sources. If
2733 these various sources together specify more than one face for a
2734 particular character, Emacs merges the attributes of the various
2735 faces. Here is the order in which Emacs merges the faces, from
2736 highest to lowest priority:
2737
2738 @itemize @bullet
2739 @item
2740 If the text consists of a special glyph, the glyph can specify a
2741 particular face. @xref{Glyphs}.
2742
2743 @item
2744 If the text lies within an active region, Emacs highlights it using
2745 the @code{region} face. @xref{Standard Faces,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs
2746 Manual}.
2747
2748 @item
2749 If the text lies within an overlay with a non-@code{nil} @code{face}
2750 property, Emacs applies the face(s) specified by that property. If
2751 the overlay has a @code{mouse-face} property and the mouse is near
2752 enough to the overlay, Emacs applies the face or face attributes
2753 specified by the @code{mouse-face} property instead. @xref{Overlay
2754 Properties}.
2755
2756 When multiple overlays cover one character, an overlay with higher
2757 priority overrides those with lower priority. @xref{Overlays}.
2758
2759 @item
2760 If the text contains a @code{face} or @code{mouse-face} property,
2761 Emacs applies the specified faces and face attributes. @xref{Special
2762 Properties}. (This is how Font Lock mode faces are applied.
2763 @xref{Font Lock Mode}.)
2764
2765 @item
2766 If the text lies within the mode line of the selected window, Emacs
2767 applies the @code{mode-line} face. For the mode line of a
2768 non-selected window, Emacs applies the @code{mode-line-inactive} face.
2769 For a header line, Emacs applies the @code{header-line} face.
2770
2771 @item
2772 If any given attribute has not been specified during the preceding
2773 steps, Emacs applies the attribute of the @code{default} face.
2774 @end itemize
2775
2776 At each stage, if a face has a valid @code{:inherit} attribute,
2777 Emacs treats any attribute with an @code{unspecified} value as having
2778 the corresponding value drawn from the parent face(s). @pxref{Face
2779 Attributes}. Note that the parent face(s) may also leave the
2780 attribute unspecified; in that case, the attribute remains unspecified
2781 at the next level of face merging.
2782
2783 @node Face Remapping
2784 @subsection Face Remapping
2785 @cindex face remapping
2786
2787 The variable @code{face-remapping-alist} is used for buffer-local or
2788 global changes in the appearance of a face. For instance, it is used
2789 to implement the @code{text-scale-adjust} command (@pxref{Text
2790 Scale,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
2791
2792 @defvar face-remapping-alist
2793 The value of this variable is an alist whose elements have the form
2794 @code{(@var{face} . @var{remapping})}. This causes Emacs to display
2795 any text having the face @var{face} with @var{remapping}, rather than
2796 the ordinary definition of @var{face}.
2797
2798 @var{remapping} may be any face spec suitable for a @code{face} text
2799 property: either a face (i.e., a face name or a property list of
2800 attribute/value pairs), or a list of faces. For details, see the
2801 description of the @code{face} text property in @ref{Special
2802 Properties}. @var{remapping} serves as the complete specification for
2803 the remapped face---it replaces the normal definition of @var{face},
2804 instead of modifying it.
2805
2806 If @code{face-remapping-alist} is buffer-local, its local value takes
2807 effect only within that buffer.
2808
2809 Note: face remapping is non-recursive. If @var{remapping} references
2810 the same face name @var{face}, either directly or via the
2811 @code{:inherit} attribute of some other face in @var{remapping}, that
2812 reference uses the normal definition of @var{face}. For instance, if
2813 the @code{mode-line} face is remapped using this entry in
2814 @code{face-remapping-alist}:
2815
2816 @example
2817 (mode-line italic mode-line)
2818 @end example
2819
2820 @noindent
2821 then the new definition of the @code{mode-line} face inherits from the
2822 @code{italic} face, and the @emph{normal} (non-remapped) definition of
2823 @code{mode-line} face.
2824 @end defvar
2825
2826 @cindex relative remapping, faces
2827 @cindex base remapping, faces
2828 The following functions implement a higher-level interface to
2829 @code{face-remapping-alist}. Most Lisp code should use these
2830 functions instead of setting @code{face-remapping-alist} directly, to
2831 avoid trampling on remappings applied elsewhere. These functions are
2832 intended for buffer-local remappings, so they all make
2833 @code{face-remapping-alist} buffer-local as a side-effect. They manage
2834 @code{face-remapping-alist} entries of the form
2835
2836 @example
2837 (@var{face} @var{relative-spec-1} @var{relative-spec-2} @var{...} @var{base-spec})
2838 @end example
2839
2840 @noindent
2841 where, as explained above, each of the @var{relative-spec-N} and
2842 @var{base-spec} is either a face name, or a property list of
2843 attribute/value pairs. Each of the @dfn{relative remapping} entries,
2844 @var{relative-spec-N}, is managed by the
2845 @code{face-remap-add-relative} and @code{face-remap-remove-relative}
2846 functions; these are intended for simple modifications like changing
2847 the text size. The @dfn{base remapping} entry, @var{base-spec}, has
2848 the lowest priority and is managed by the @code{face-remap-set-base}
2849 and @code{face-remap-reset-base} functions; it is intended for major
2850 modes to remap faces in the buffers they control.
2851
2852 @defun face-remap-add-relative face &rest specs
2853 This function adds the face spec in @var{specs} as relative
2854 remappings for face @var{face} in the current buffer. The remaining
2855 arguments, @var{specs}, should form either a list of face names, or a
2856 property list of attribute/value pairs.
2857
2858 The return value is a Lisp object that serves as a cookie; you can
2859 pass this object as an argument to @code{face-remap-remove-relative}
2860 if you need to remove the remapping later.
2861
2862 @example
2863 ;; Remap the 'escape-glyph' face into a combination
2864 ;; of the 'highlight' and 'italic' faces:
2865 (face-remap-add-relative 'escape-glyph 'highlight 'italic)
2866
2867 ;; Increase the size of the 'default' face by 50%:
2868 (face-remap-add-relative 'default :height 1.5)
2869 @end example
2870 @end defun
2871
2872 @defun face-remap-remove-relative cookie
2873 This function removes a relative remapping previously added by
2874 @code{face-remap-add-relative}. @var{cookie} should be the Lisp
2875 object returned by @code{face-remap-add-relative} when the remapping
2876 was added.
2877 @end defun
2878
2879 @defun face-remap-set-base face &rest specs
2880 This function sets the base remapping of @var{face} in the current
2881 buffer to @var{specs}. If @var{specs} is empty, the default base
2882 remapping is restored, similar to calling @code{face-remap-reset-base}
2883 (see below); note that this is different from @var{specs} containing a
2884 single value @code{nil}, which has the opposite result (the global
2885 definition of @var{face} is ignored).
2886
2887 This overwrites the default @var{base-spec}, which inherits the global
2888 face definition, so it is up to the caller to add such inheritance if
2889 so desired.
2890 @end defun
2891
2892 @defun face-remap-reset-base face
2893 This function sets the base remapping of @var{face} to its default
2894 value, which inherits from @var{face}'s global definition.
2895 @end defun
2896
2897 @node Face Functions
2898 @subsection Functions for Working with Faces
2899
2900 Here are additional functions for creating and working with faces.
2901
2902 @defun face-list
2903 This function returns a list of all defined face names.
2904 @end defun
2905
2906 @defun face-id face
2907 This function returns the @dfn{face number} of face @var{face}. This
2908 is a number that uniquely identifies a face at low levels within
2909 Emacs. It is seldom necessary to refer to a face by its face number.
2910 @end defun
2911
2912 @defun face-documentation face
2913 This function returns the documentation string of face @var{face}, or
2914 @code{nil} if none was specified for it.
2915 @end defun
2916
2917 @defun face-equal face1 face2 &optional frame
2918 This returns @code{t} if the faces @var{face1} and @var{face2} have the
2919 same attributes for display.
2920 @end defun
2921
2922 @defun face-differs-from-default-p face &optional frame
2923 This returns non-@code{nil} if the face @var{face} displays
2924 differently from the default face.
2925 @end defun
2926
2927 @cindex face alias
2928 @cindex alias, for faces
2929 A @dfn{face alias} provides an equivalent name for a face. You can
2930 define a face alias by giving the alias symbol the @code{face-alias}
2931 property, with a value of the target face name. The following example
2932 makes @code{modeline} an alias for the @code{mode-line} face.
2933
2934 @example
2935 (put 'modeline 'face-alias 'mode-line)
2936 @end example
2937
2938 @defmac define-obsolete-face-alias obsolete-face current-face when
2939 This macro defines @code{obsolete-face} as an alias for
2940 @var{current-face}, and also marks it as obsolete, indicating that it
2941 may be removed in future. @var{when} should be a string indicating
2942 when @code{obsolete-face} was made obsolete (usually a version number
2943 string).
2944 @end defmac
2945
2946 @node Auto Faces
2947 @subsection Automatic Face Assignment
2948 @cindex automatic face assignment
2949 @cindex faces, automatic choice
2950
2951 This hook is used for automatically assigning faces to text in the
2952 buffer. It is part of the implementation of Jit-Lock mode, used by
2953 Font-Lock.
2954
2955 @defvar fontification-functions
2956 This variable holds a list of functions that are called by Emacs
2957 redisplay as needed, just before doing redisplay. They are called even
2958 when Font Lock Mode isn't enabled. When Font Lock Mode is enabled, this
2959 variable usually holds just one function, @code{jit-lock-function}.
2960
2961 The functions are called in the order listed, with one argument, a
2962 buffer position @var{pos}. Collectively they should attempt to assign
2963 faces to the text in the current buffer starting at @var{pos}.
2964
2965 The functions should record the faces they assign by setting the
2966 @code{face} property. They should also add a non-@code{nil}
2967 @code{fontified} property to all the text they have assigned faces to.
2968 That property tells redisplay that faces have been assigned to that text
2969 already.
2970
2971 It is probably a good idea for the functions to do nothing if the
2972 character after @var{pos} already has a non-@code{nil} @code{fontified}
2973 property, but this is not required. If one function overrides the
2974 assignments made by a previous one, the properties after the last
2975 function finishes are the ones that really matter.
2976
2977 For efficiency, we recommend writing these functions so that they
2978 usually assign faces to around 400 to 600 characters at each call.
2979 @end defvar
2980
2981 @node Basic Faces
2982 @subsection Basic Faces
2983 @cindex basic faces
2984
2985 If your Emacs Lisp program needs to assign some faces to text, it is
2986 often a good idea to use certain existing faces or inherit from them,
2987 rather than defining entirely new faces. This way, if other users
2988 have customized the basic faces to give Emacs a certain look, your
2989 program will fit in without additional customization.
2990
2991 Some of the basic faces defined in Emacs are listed below. In
2992 addition to these, you might want to make use of the Font Lock faces
2993 for syntactic highlighting, if highlighting is not already handled by
2994 Font Lock mode, or if some Font Lock faces are not in use.
2995 @xref{Faces for Font Lock}.
2996
2997 @table @code
2998 @item default
2999 The default face, whose attributes are all specified. All other faces
3000 implicitly inherit from it: any unspecified attribute defaults to the
3001 attribute on this face (@pxref{Face Attributes}).
3002
3003 @item bold
3004 @itemx italic
3005 @itemx bold-italic
3006 @itemx underline
3007 @itemx fixed-pitch
3008 @itemx variable-pitch
3009 These have the attributes indicated by their names (e.g., @code{bold}
3010 has a bold @code{:weight} attribute), with all other attributes
3011 unspecified (and so given by @code{default}).
3012
3013 @item shadow
3014 For dimmed-out text. For example, it is used for the ignored
3015 part of a filename in the minibuffer (@pxref{Minibuffer File,,
3016 Minibuffers for File Names, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
3017
3018 @item link
3019 @itemx link-visited
3020 For clickable text buttons that send the user to a different
3021 buffer or location.
3022
3023 @item highlight
3024 For stretches of text that should temporarily stand out. For example,
3025 it is commonly assigned to the @code{mouse-face} property for cursor
3026 highlighting (@pxref{Special Properties}).
3027
3028 @item match
3029 For text matching a search command.
3030
3031 @item error
3032 @itemx warning
3033 @itemx success
3034 For text concerning errors, warnings, or successes. For example,
3035 these are used for messages in @file{*Compilation*} buffers.
3036 @end table
3037
3038 @node Font Selection
3039 @subsection Font Selection
3040 @cindex font selection
3041 @cindex selecting a font
3042
3043 Before Emacs can draw a character on a graphical display, it must
3044 select a @dfn{font} for that character@footnote{In this context, the
3045 term @dfn{font} has nothing to do with Font Lock (@pxref{Font Lock
3046 Mode}).}. @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}. Normally,
3047 Emacs automatically chooses a font based on the faces assigned to that
3048 character---specifically, the face attributes @code{:family},
3049 @code{:weight}, @code{:slant}, and @code{:width} (@pxref{Face
3050 Attributes}). The choice of font also depends on the character to be
3051 displayed; some fonts can only display a limited set of characters.
3052 If no available font exactly fits the requirements, Emacs looks for
3053 the @dfn{closest matching font}. The variables in this section
3054 control how Emacs makes this selection.
3055
3056 @defopt face-font-family-alternatives
3057 If a given family is specified but does not exist, this variable
3058 specifies alternative font families to try. Each element should have
3059 this form:
3060
3061 @example
3062 (@var{family} @var{alternate-families}@dots{})
3063 @end example
3064
3065 If @var{family} is specified but not available, Emacs will try the other
3066 families given in @var{alternate-families}, one by one, until it finds a
3067 family that does exist.
3068 @end defopt
3069
3070 @defopt face-font-selection-order
3071 If there is no font that exactly matches all desired face attributes
3072 (@code{:width}, @code{:height}, @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant}),
3073 this variable specifies the order in which these attributes should be
3074 considered when selecting the closest matching font. The value should
3075 be a list containing those four attribute symbols, in order of
3076 decreasing importance. The default is @code{(:width :height :weight
3077 :slant)}.
3078
3079 Font selection first finds the best available matches for the first
3080 attribute in the list; then, among the fonts which are best in that
3081 way, it searches for the best matches in the second attribute, and so
3082 on.
3083
3084 The attributes @code{:weight} and @code{:width} have symbolic values in
3085 a range centered around @code{normal}. Matches that are more extreme
3086 (farther from @code{normal}) are somewhat preferred to matches that are
3087 less extreme (closer to @code{normal}); this is designed to ensure that
3088 non-normal faces contrast with normal ones, whenever possible.
3089
3090 One example of a case where this variable makes a difference is when the
3091 default font has no italic equivalent. With the default ordering, the
3092 @code{italic} face will use a non-italic font that is similar to the
3093 default one. But if you put @code{:slant} before @code{:height}, the
3094 @code{italic} face will use an italic font, even if its height is not
3095 quite right.
3096 @end defopt
3097
3098 @defopt face-font-registry-alternatives
3099 This variable lets you specify alternative font registries to try, if a
3100 given registry is specified and doesn't exist. Each element should have
3101 this form:
3102
3103 @example
3104 (@var{registry} @var{alternate-registries}@dots{})
3105 @end example
3106
3107 If @var{registry} is specified but not available, Emacs will try the
3108 other registries given in @var{alternate-registries}, one by one,
3109 until it finds a registry that does exist.
3110 @end defopt
3111
3112 @cindex scalable fonts
3113 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts, but by default it does not use
3114 them.
3115
3116 @defopt scalable-fonts-allowed
3117 This variable controls which scalable fonts to use. A value of
3118 @code{nil}, the default, means do not use scalable fonts. @code{t}
3119 means to use any scalable font that seems appropriate for the text.
3120
3121 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. Then a
3122 scalable font is enabled for use if its name matches any regular
3123 expression in the list. For example,
3124
3125 @example
3126 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("iso10646-1$"))
3127 @end example
3128
3129 @noindent
3130 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry @code{iso10646-1}.
3131 @end defopt
3132
3133 @defvar face-font-rescale-alist
3134 This variable specifies scaling for certain faces. Its value should
3135 be a list of elements of the form
3136
3137 @example
3138 (@var{fontname-regexp} . @var{scale-factor})
3139 @end example
3140
3141 If @var{fontname-regexp} matches the font name that is about to be
3142 used, this says to choose a larger similar font according to the
3143 factor @var{scale-factor}. You would use this feature to normalize
3144 the font size if certain fonts are bigger or smaller than their
3145 nominal heights and widths would suggest.
3146 @end defvar
3147
3148 @node Font Lookup
3149 @subsection Looking Up Fonts
3150 @cindex font lookup
3151 @cindex looking up fonts
3152
3153 @defun x-list-fonts name &optional reference-face frame maximum width
3154 This function returns a list of available font names that match
3155 @var{name}. @var{name} should be a string containing a font name in
3156 either the Fontconfig, GTK, or XLFD format (@pxref{Fonts,,, emacs, The
3157 GNU Emacs Manual}). Within an XLFD string, wildcard characters may be
3158 used: the @samp{*} character matches any substring, and the @samp{?}
3159 character matches any single character. Case is ignored when matching
3160 font names.
3161
3162 If the optional arguments @var{reference-face} and @var{frame} are
3163 specified, the returned list includes only fonts that are the same
3164 size as @var{reference-face} (a face name) currently is on the frame
3165 @var{frame}.
3166
3167 The optional argument @var{maximum} sets a limit on how many fonts to
3168 return. If it is non-@code{nil}, then the return value is truncated
3169 after the first @var{maximum} matching fonts. Specifying a small
3170 value for @var{maximum} can make this function much faster, in cases
3171 where many fonts match the pattern.
3172
3173 The optional argument @var{width} specifies a desired font width. If
3174 it is non-@code{nil}, the function only returns those fonts whose
3175 characters are (on average) @var{width} times as wide as
3176 @var{reference-face}.
3177 @end defun
3178
3179 @defun x-family-fonts &optional family frame
3180 This function returns a list describing the available fonts for family
3181 @var{family} on @var{frame}. If @var{family} is omitted or @code{nil},
3182 this list applies to all families, and therefore, it contains all
3183 available fonts. Otherwise, @var{family} must be a string; it may
3184 contain the wildcards @samp{?} and @samp{*}.
3185
3186 The list describes the display that @var{frame} is on; if @var{frame} is
3187 omitted or @code{nil}, it applies to the selected frame's display
3188 (@pxref{Input Focus}).
3189
3190 Each element in the list is a vector of the following form:
3191
3192 @example
3193 [@var{family} @var{width} @var{point-size} @var{weight} @var{slant}
3194 @var{fixed-p} @var{full} @var{registry-and-encoding}]
3195 @end example
3196
3197 The first five elements correspond to face attributes; if you
3198 specify these attributes for a face, it will use this font.
3199
3200 The last three elements give additional information about the font.
3201 @var{fixed-p} is non-@code{nil} if the font is fixed-pitch.
3202 @var{full} is the full name of the font, and
3203 @var{registry-and-encoding} is a string giving the registry and
3204 encoding of the font.
3205 @end defun
3206
3207 @node Fontsets
3208 @subsection Fontsets
3209 @cindex fontset
3210
3211 A @dfn{fontset} is a list of fonts, each assigned to a range of
3212 character codes. An individual font cannot display the whole range of
3213 characters that Emacs supports, but a fontset can. Fontsets have names,
3214 just as fonts do, and you can use a fontset name in place of a font name
3215 when you specify the font for a frame or a face. Here is
3216 information about defining a fontset under Lisp program control.
3217
3218 @defun create-fontset-from-fontset-spec fontset-spec &optional style-variant-p noerror
3219 This function defines a new fontset according to the specification
3220 string @var{fontset-spec}. The string should have this format:
3221
3222 @smallexample
3223 @var{fontpattern}, @r{[}@var{charset}:@var{font}@r{]@dots{}}
3224 @end smallexample
3225
3226 @noindent
3227 Whitespace characters before and after the commas are ignored.
3228
3229 The first part of the string, @var{fontpattern}, should have the form of
3230 a standard X font name, except that the last two fields should be
3231 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}}.
3232
3233 The new fontset has two names, one long and one short. The long name is
3234 @var{fontpattern} in its entirety. The short name is
3235 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}}. You can refer to the fontset by either
3236 name. If a fontset with the same name already exists, an error is
3237 signaled, unless @var{noerror} is non-@code{nil}, in which case this
3238 function does nothing.
3239
3240 If optional argument @var{style-variant-p} is non-@code{nil}, that says
3241 to create bold, italic and bold-italic variants of the fontset as well.
3242 These variant fontsets do not have a short name, only a long one, which
3243 is made by altering @var{fontpattern} to indicate the bold and/or italic
3244 status.
3245
3246 The specification string also says which fonts to use in the fontset.
3247 See below for the details.
3248 @end defun
3249
3250 The construct @samp{@var{charset}:@var{font}} specifies which font to
3251 use (in this fontset) for one particular character set. Here,
3252 @var{charset} is the name of a character set, and @var{font} is the font
3253 to use for that character set. You can use this construct any number of
3254 times in the specification string.
3255
3256 For the remaining character sets, those that you don't specify
3257 explicitly, Emacs chooses a font based on @var{fontpattern}: it replaces
3258 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}} with a value that names one character set.
3259 For the @acronym{ASCII} character set, @samp{fontset-@var{alias}} is replaced
3260 with @samp{ISO8859-1}.
3261
3262 In addition, when several consecutive fields are wildcards, Emacs
3263 collapses them into a single wildcard. This is to prevent use of
3264 auto-scaled fonts. Fonts made by scaling larger fonts are not usable
3265 for editing, and scaling a smaller font is not useful because it is
3266 better to use the smaller font in its own size, which Emacs does.
3267
3268 Thus if @var{fontpattern} is this,
3269
3270 @example
3271 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
3272 @end example
3273
3274 @noindent
3275 the font specification for @acronym{ASCII} characters would be this:
3276
3277 @example
3278 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
3279 @end example
3280
3281 @noindent
3282 and the font specification for Chinese GB2312 characters would be this:
3283
3284 @example
3285 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*
3286 @end example
3287
3288 You may not have any Chinese font matching the above font
3289 specification. Most X distributions include only Chinese fonts that
3290 have @samp{song ti} or @samp{fangsong ti} in the @var{family} field. In
3291 such a case, @samp{Fontset-@var{n}} can be specified as below:
3292
3293 @smallexample
3294 Emacs.Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24,\
3295 chinese-gb2312:-*-*-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*
3296 @end smallexample
3297
3298 @noindent
3299 Then, the font specifications for all but Chinese GB2312 characters have
3300 @samp{fixed} in the @var{family} field, and the font specification for
3301 Chinese GB2312 characters has a wild card @samp{*} in the @var{family}
3302 field.
3303
3304 @defun set-fontset-font name character font-spec &optional frame add
3305 This function modifies the existing fontset @var{name} to use the font
3306 matching with @var{font-spec} for the specified @var{character}.
3307
3308 If @var{name} is @code{nil}, this function modifies the fontset of the
3309 selected frame or that of @var{frame} if @var{frame} is not
3310 @code{nil}.
3311
3312 If @var{name} is @code{t}, this function modifies the default
3313 fontset, whose short name is @samp{fontset-default}.
3314
3315 In addition to specifying a single codepoint, @var{character} may be a
3316 cons @code{(@var{from} . @var{to})}, where @var{from} and @var{to} are
3317 character codepoints. In that case, use @var{font-spec} for all the
3318 characters in the range @var{from} and @var{to} (inclusive).
3319
3320 @var{character} may be a charset. In that case, use
3321 @var{font-spec} for all character in the charsets.
3322
3323 @var{character} may be a script name. In that case, use
3324 @var{font-spec} for all character in the charsets.
3325
3326 @var{font-spec} may be a font-spec object created by the function
3327 @code{font-spec} (@pxref{Low-Level Font}).
3328
3329 @var{font-spec} may be a cons; @code{(@var{family} . @var{registry})},
3330 where @var{family} is a family name of a font (possibly including a
3331 foundry name at the head), @var{registry} is a registry name of a font
3332 (possibly including an encoding name at the tail).
3333
3334 @var{font-spec} may be a font name string.
3335
3336 @var{font-spec} may be @code{nil}, which explicitly specifies that
3337 there's no font for the specified @var{character}. This is useful,
3338 for example, to avoid expensive system-wide search for fonts for
3339 characters that have no glyphs, like those from the Unicode Private
3340 Use Area (PUA).
3341
3342 The optional argument @var{add}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies how to
3343 add @var{font-spec} to the font specifications previously set. If it
3344 is @code{prepend}, @var{font-spec} is prepended. If it is
3345 @code{append}, @var{font-spec} is appended. By default,
3346 @var{font-spec} overrides the previous settings.
3347
3348 For instance, this changes the default fontset to use a font of which
3349 family name is @samp{Kochi Gothic} for all characters belonging to
3350 the charset @code{japanese-jisx0208}.
3351
3352 @smallexample
3353 (set-fontset-font t 'japanese-jisx0208
3354 (font-spec :family "Kochi Gothic"))
3355 @end smallexample
3356 @end defun
3357
3358 @defun char-displayable-p char
3359 This function returns @code{t} if Emacs ought to be able to display
3360 @var{char}. More precisely, if the selected frame's fontset has a
3361 font to display the character set that @var{char} belongs to.
3362
3363 Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset
3364 does that, this function's value may not be accurate.
3365 @end defun
3366
3367 @node Low-Level Font
3368 @subsection Low-Level Font Representation
3369 @cindex font property
3370
3371 Normally, it is not necessary to manipulate fonts directly. In case
3372 you need to do so, this section explains how.
3373
3374 In Emacs Lisp, fonts are represented using three different Lisp
3375 object types: @dfn{font objects}, @dfn{font specs}, and @dfn{font
3376 entities}.
3377
3378 @defun fontp object &optional type
3379 Return @code{t} if @var{object} is a font object, font spec, or font
3380 entity. Otherwise, return @code{nil}.
3381
3382 The optional argument @var{type}, if non-@code{nil}, determines the
3383 exact type of Lisp object to check for. In that case, @var{type}
3384 should be one of @code{font-object}, @code{font-spec}, or
3385 @code{font-entity}.
3386 @end defun
3387
3388 @cindex font object
3389 A font object is a Lisp object that represents a font that Emacs has
3390 @dfn{opened}. Font objects cannot be modified in Lisp, but they can
3391 be inspected.
3392
3393 @defun font-at position &optional window string
3394 Return the font object that is being used to display the character at
3395 position @var{position} in the window @var{window}. If @var{window}
3396 is @code{nil}, it defaults to the selected window. If @var{string} is
3397 @code{nil}, @var{position} specifies a position in the current buffer;
3398 otherwise, @var{string} should be a string, and @var{position}
3399 specifies a position in that string.
3400 @end defun
3401
3402 @cindex font spec
3403 A font spec is a Lisp object that contains a set of specifications
3404 that can be used to find a font. More than one font may match the
3405 specifications in a font spec.
3406
3407 @defun font-spec &rest arguments
3408 Return a new font spec using the specifications in @var{arguments},
3409 which should come in @code{property}-@code{value} pairs. The possible
3410 specifications are as follows:
3411
3412 @table @code
3413 @item :name
3414 The font name (a string), in either XLFD, Fontconfig, or GTK format.
3415 @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
3416
3417 @item :family
3418 @itemx :foundry
3419 @itemx :weight
3420 @itemx :slant
3421 @itemx :width
3422 These have the same meanings as the face attributes of the same name.
3423 @xref{Face Attributes}.
3424
3425 @item :size
3426 The font size---either a non-negative integer that specifies the pixel
3427 size, or a floating-point number that specifies the point size.
3428
3429 @item :adstyle
3430 Additional typographic style information for the font, such as
3431 @samp{sans}. The value should be a string or a symbol.
3432
3433 @cindex font registry
3434 @item :registry
3435 The charset registry and encoding of the font, such as
3436 @samp{iso8859-1}. The value should be a string or a symbol.
3437
3438 @item :script
3439 The script that the font must support (a symbol).
3440
3441 @item :lang
3442 The language that the font should support. The value should be a
3443 symbol whose name is a two-letter ISO-639 language name. On X, the
3444 value is matched against the ``Additional Style'' field of the XLFD
3445 name of a font, if it is non-empty. On MS-Windows, fonts matching the
3446 spec are required to support codepages needed for the language.
3447 Currently, only a small set of CJK languages is supported with this
3448 property: @samp{ja}, @samp{ko}, and @samp{zh}.
3449
3450 @item :otf
3451 @cindex OpenType font
3452 The font must be an OpenType font that supports these OpenType
3453 features, provided Emacs is compiled with a library, such as
3454 @samp{libotf} on GNU/Linux, that supports complex text layout for
3455 scripts which need that. The value must be a list of the form
3456
3457 @smallexample
3458 @code{(@var{script-tag} @var{langsys-tag} @var{gsub} @var{gpos})}
3459 @end smallexample
3460
3461 where @var{script-tag} is the OpenType script tag symbol;
3462 @var{langsys-tag} is the OpenType language system tag symbol, or
3463 @code{nil} to use the default language system; @code{gsub} is a list
3464 of OpenType GSUB feature tag symbols, or @code{nil} if none is
3465 required; and @code{gpos} is a list of OpenType GPOS feature tag
3466 symbols, or @code{nil} if none is required. If @code{gsub} or
3467 @code{gpos} is a list, a @code{nil} element in that list means that
3468 the font must not match any of the remaining tag symbols. The
3469 @code{gpos} element may be omitted.
3470 @end table
3471 @end defun
3472
3473 @defun font-put font-spec property value
3474 Set the font property @var{property} in the font-spec @var{font-spec}
3475 to @var{value}.
3476 @end defun
3477
3478 @cindex font entity
3479 A font entity is a reference to a font that need not be open. Its
3480 properties are intermediate between a font object and a font spec:
3481 like a font object, and unlike a font spec, it refers to a single,
3482 specific font. Unlike a font object, creating a font entity does not
3483 load the contents of that font into computer memory. Emacs may open
3484 multiple font objects of different sizes from a single font entity
3485 referring to a scalable font.
3486
3487 @defun find-font font-spec &optional frame
3488 This function returns a font entity that best matches the font spec
3489 @var{font-spec} on frame @var{frame}. If @var{frame} is @code{nil},
3490 it defaults to the selected frame.
3491 @end defun
3492
3493 @defun list-fonts font-spec &optional frame num prefer
3494 This function returns a list of all font entities that match the font
3495 spec @var{font-spec}.
3496
3497 The optional argument @var{frame}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
3498 frame on which the fonts are to be displayed. The optional argument
3499 @var{num}, if non-@code{nil}, should be an integer that specifies the
3500 maximum length of the returned list. The optional argument
3501 @var{prefer}, if non-@code{nil}, should be another font spec, which is
3502 used to control the order of the returned list; the returned font
3503 entities are sorted in order of decreasing closeness to that font
3504 spec.
3505 @end defun
3506
3507 If you call @code{set-face-attribute} and pass a font spec, font
3508 entity, or font name string as the value of the @code{:font}
3509 attribute, Emacs opens the best matching font that is available
3510 for display. It then stores the corresponding font object as the
3511 actual value of the @code{:font} attribute for that face.
3512
3513 The following functions can be used to obtain information about a
3514 font. For these functions, the @var{font} argument can be a font
3515 object, a font entity, or a font spec.
3516
3517 @defun font-get font property
3518 This function returns the value of the font property @var{property}
3519 for @var{font}.
3520
3521 If @var{font} is a font spec and the font spec does not specify
3522 @var{property}, the return value is @code{nil}. If @var{font} is a
3523 font object or font entity, the value for the @var{:script} property
3524 may be a list of scripts supported by the font.
3525 @end defun
3526
3527 @defun font-face-attributes font &optional frame
3528 This function returns a list of face attributes corresponding to
3529 @var{font}. The optional argument @var{frame} specifies the frame on
3530 which the font is to be displayed. If it is @code{nil}, the selected
3531 frame is used. The return value has the form
3532
3533 @smallexample
3534 (:family @var{family} :height @var{height} :weight @var{weight}
3535 :slant @var{slant} :width @var{width})
3536 @end smallexample
3537
3538 where the values of @var{family}, @var{height}, @var{weight},
3539 @var{slant}, and @var{width} are face attribute values. Some of these
3540 key-attribute pairs may be omitted from the list if they are not
3541 specified by @var{font}.
3542 @end defun
3543
3544 @defun font-xlfd-name font &optional fold-wildcards
3545 This function returns the XLFD (X Logical Font Descriptor), a string,
3546 matching @var{font}. @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
3547 information about XLFDs. If the name is too long for an XLFD (which
3548 can contain at most 255 characters), the function returns @code{nil}.
3549
3550 If the optional argument @var{fold-wildcards} is non-@code{nil},
3551 consecutive wildcards in the XLFD are folded into one.
3552 @end defun
3553
3554 The following two functions return important information about a font.
3555
3556 @defun font-info name &optional frame
3557 This function returns information about a font specified by its
3558 @var{name}, a string, as it is used on @var{frame}. If @var{frame} is
3559 omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the selected frame.
3560
3561 The value returned by the function is a vector of the form
3562 @code{[@var{opened-name} @var{full-name} @var{size} @var{height}
3563 @var{baseline-offset} @var{relative-compose} @var{default-ascent}
3564 @var{max-width} @var{ascent} @var{descent} @var{space-width}
3565 @var{average-width} @var{filename} @var{capability}]}. Here's the
3566 description of each components of this vector:
3567
3568 @table @var
3569 @item opened-name
3570 The name used to open the font, a string.
3571
3572 @item full-name
3573 The full name of the font, a string.
3574
3575 @item size
3576 The pixel size of the font.
3577
3578 @item height
3579 The height of the font in pixels.
3580
3581 @item baseline-offset
3582 The offset in pixels from the @acronym{ASCII} baseline, positive
3583 upward.
3584
3585 @item relative-compose
3586 @itemx default-ascent
3587 Numbers controlling how to compose characters.
3588
3589 @item ascent
3590 @itemx descent
3591 The ascent and descent of this font. The sum of these two numbers
3592 should be equal to the value of @var{height} above.
3593
3594 @item space-width
3595 The width, in pixels, of the font's space character.
3596
3597 @item average-width
3598 The average width of the font characters. If this is zero, Emacs uses
3599 the value of @var{space-width} instead, when it calculates text layout
3600 on display.
3601
3602 @item filename
3603 The file name of the font as a string. This can be @code{nil} if the
3604 font back-end does not provide a way to find out the font's file name.
3605
3606 @item capability
3607 A list whose first element is a symbol representing the font type, one
3608 of @code{x}, @code{opentype}, @code{truetype}, @code{type1},
3609 @code{pcf}, or @code{bdf}. For OpenType fonts, the list includes 2
3610 additional elements describing the @sc{gsub} and @sc{gpos} features
3611 supported by the font. Each of these elements is a list of the form
3612 @code{((@var{script} (@var{langsys} @var{feature} @dots{}) @dots{})
3613 @dots{})}, where @var{script} is a symbol representing an OpenType
3614 script tag, @var{langsys} is a symbol representing an OpenType langsys
3615 tag (or @code{nil}, which stands for the default langsys), and each
3616 @var{feature} is a symbol representing an OpenType feature tag.
3617 @end table
3618 @end defun
3619
3620 @defun query-font font-object
3621 This function returns information about a @var{font-object}. (This is
3622 in contrast to @code{font-info}, which takes the font name, a string,
3623 as its argument.)
3624
3625 The value returned by the function is a vector of the form
3626 @code{[@var{name} @var{filename} @var{pixel-size} @var{max-width}
3627 @var{ascent} @var{descent} @var{space-width} @var{average-width}
3628 @var{capability}]}. Here's the description of each components of this
3629 vector:
3630
3631 @table @var
3632 @item name
3633 The font name, a string.
3634
3635 @item filename
3636 The file name of the font as a string. This can be @code{nil} if the
3637 font back-end does not provide a way to find out the font's file name.
3638
3639 @item pixel-size
3640 The pixel size of the font used to open the font.
3641
3642 @item max-width
3643 The maximum advance width of the font.
3644
3645 @item ascent
3646 @itemx descent
3647 The ascent and descent of this font. The sum of these two numbers
3648 gives the font height.
3649
3650 @item space-width
3651 The width, in pixels, of the font's space character.
3652
3653 @item average-width
3654 The average width of the font characters. If this is zero, Emacs uses
3655 the value of @var{space-width} instead, when it calculates text layout
3656 on display.
3657
3658 @item capability
3659 A list whose first element is a symbol representing the font type, one
3660 of @code{x}, @code{opentype}, @code{truetype}, @code{type1},
3661 @code{pcf}, or @code{bdf}. For OpenType fonts, the list includes 2
3662 additional elements describing the @sc{gsub} and @sc{gpos} features
3663 supported by the font. Each of these elements is a list of the form
3664 @code{((@var{script} (@var{langsys} @var{feature} @dots{}) @dots{})
3665 @dots{})}, where @var{script} is a symbol representing an OpenType
3666 script tag, @var{langsys} is a symbol representing an OpenType langsys
3667 tag (or @code{nil}, which stands for the default langsys), and each
3668 @var{feature} is a symbol representing an OpenType feature tag.
3669 @end table
3670 @end defun
3671
3672 @cindex font information for layout
3673 The following four functions return size information about fonts used
3674 by various faces, allowing various layout considerations in Lisp
3675 programs. These functions take face remapping into consideration,
3676 returning information about the remapped face, if the face in question
3677 was remapped. @xref{Face Remapping}.
3678
3679 @defun default-font-width
3680 This function returns the average width in pixels of the font used by
3681 the current buffer's default face.
3682 @end defun
3683
3684 @defun default-font-height
3685 This function returns the height in pixels of the font used by the
3686 current buffer's default face.
3687 @end defun
3688
3689 @defun window-font-width &optional window face
3690 This function returns the average width in pixels for the font used by
3691 @var{face} in @var{window}. The specified @var{window} must be a live
3692 window. If @code{nil} or omitted, @var{window} defaults to the
3693 selected window, and @var{face} defaults to the default face in
3694 @var{window}.
3695 @end defun
3696
3697 @defun window-font-height &optional window face
3698 This function returns the height in pixels for the font used by
3699 @var{face} in @var{window}. The specified @var{window} must be a live
3700 window. If @code{nil} or omitted, @var{window} defaults to the
3701 selected window, and @var{face} defaults to the default face in
3702 @var{window}.
3703 @end defun
3704
3705 @node Fringes
3706 @section Fringes
3707 @cindex fringes
3708
3709 On graphical displays, Emacs draws @dfn{fringes} next to each
3710 window: thin vertical strips down the sides which can display bitmaps
3711 indicating truncation, continuation, horizontal scrolling, and so on.
3712
3713 @menu
3714 * Fringe Size/Pos:: Specifying where to put the window fringes.
3715 * Fringe Indicators:: Displaying indicator icons in the window fringes.
3716 * Fringe Cursors:: Displaying cursors in the right fringe.
3717 * Fringe Bitmaps:: Specifying bitmaps for fringe indicators.
3718 * Customizing Bitmaps:: Specifying your own bitmaps to use in the fringes.
3719 * Overlay Arrow:: Display of an arrow to indicate position.
3720 @end menu
3721
3722 @node Fringe Size/Pos
3723 @subsection Fringe Size and Position
3724
3725 The following buffer-local variables control the position and width
3726 of fringes in windows showing that buffer.
3727
3728 @defvar fringes-outside-margins
3729 The fringes normally appear between the display margins and the window
3730 text. If the value is non-@code{nil}, they appear outside the display
3731 margins. @xref{Display Margins}.
3732 @end defvar
3733
3734 @defvar left-fringe-width
3735 This variable, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the width of the left
3736 fringe in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the left fringe
3737 width from the window's frame.
3738 @end defvar
3739
3740 @defvar right-fringe-width
3741 This variable, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the width of the right
3742 fringe in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the right fringe
3743 width from the window's frame.
3744 @end defvar
3745
3746 Any buffer which does not specify values for these variables uses
3747 the values specified by the @code{left-fringe} and @code{right-fringe}
3748 frame parameters (@pxref{Layout Parameters}).
3749
3750 The above variables actually take effect via the function
3751 @code{set-window-buffer} (@pxref{Buffers and Windows}), which calls
3752 @code{set-window-fringes} as a subroutine. If you change one of these
3753 variables, the fringe display is not updated in existing windows
3754 showing the buffer, unless you call @code{set-window-buffer} again in
3755 each affected window. You can also use @code{set-window-fringes} to
3756 control the fringe display in individual windows.
3757
3758 @defun set-window-fringes window left &optional right outside-margins
3759 This function sets the fringe widths of window @var{window}.
3760 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the selected window is used.
3761
3762 The argument @var{left} specifies the width in pixels of the left
3763 fringe, and likewise @var{right} for the right fringe. A value of
3764 @code{nil} for either one stands for the default width. If
3765 @var{outside-margins} is non-@code{nil}, that specifies that fringes
3766 should appear outside of the display margins.
3767 @end defun
3768
3769 @defun window-fringes &optional window
3770 This function returns information about the fringes of a window
3771 @var{window}. If @var{window} is omitted or @code{nil}, the selected
3772 window is used. The value has the form @code{(@var{left-width}
3773 @var{right-width} @var{outside-margins})}.
3774 @end defun
3775
3776
3777 @node Fringe Indicators
3778 @subsection Fringe Indicators
3779 @cindex fringe indicators
3780 @cindex indicators, fringe
3781
3782 @dfn{Fringe indicators} are tiny icons displayed in the window
3783 fringe to indicate truncated or continued lines, buffer boundaries,
3784 etc.
3785
3786 @defopt indicate-empty-lines
3787 @cindex fringes, and empty line indication
3788 @cindex empty lines, indicating
3789 When this is non-@code{nil}, Emacs displays a special glyph in the
3790 fringe of each empty line at the end of the buffer, on graphical
3791 displays. @xref{Fringes}. This variable is automatically
3792 buffer-local in every buffer.
3793 @end defopt
3794
3795 @defopt indicate-buffer-boundaries
3796 @cindex buffer boundaries, indicating
3797 This buffer-local variable controls how the buffer boundaries and
3798 window scrolling are indicated in the window fringes.
3799
3800 Emacs can indicate the buffer boundaries---that is, the first and last
3801 line in the buffer---with angle icons when they appear on the screen.
3802 In addition, Emacs can display an up-arrow in the fringe to show
3803 that there is text above the screen, and a down-arrow to show
3804 there is text below the screen.
3805
3806 There are three kinds of basic values:
3807
3808 @table @asis
3809 @item @code{nil}
3810 Don't display any of these fringe icons.
3811 @item @code{left}
3812 Display the angle icons and arrows in the left fringe.
3813 @item @code{right}
3814 Display the angle icons and arrows in the right fringe.
3815 @item any non-alist
3816 Display the angle icons in the left fringe
3817 and don't display the arrows.
3818 @end table
3819
3820 Otherwise the value should be an alist that specifies which fringe
3821 indicators to display and where. Each element of the alist should
3822 have the form @code{(@var{indicator} . @var{position})}. Here,
3823 @var{indicator} is one of @code{top}, @code{bottom}, @code{up},
3824 @code{down}, and @code{t} (which covers all the icons not yet
3825 specified), while @var{position} is one of @code{left}, @code{right}
3826 and @code{nil}.
3827
3828 For example, @code{((top . left) (t . right))} places the top angle
3829 bitmap in left fringe, and the bottom angle bitmap as well as both
3830 arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show the angle bitmaps in the left
3831 fringe, and no arrow bitmaps, use @code{((top . left) (bottom . left))}.
3832 @end defopt
3833
3834 @defvar fringe-indicator-alist
3835 This buffer-local variable specifies the mapping from logical fringe
3836 indicators to the actual bitmaps displayed in the window fringes. The
3837 value is an alist of elements @code{(@var{indicator}
3838 . @var{bitmaps})}, where @var{indicator} specifies a logical indicator
3839 type and @var{bitmaps} specifies the fringe bitmaps to use for that
3840 indicator.
3841
3842 Each @var{indicator} should be one of the following symbols:
3843
3844 @table @asis
3845 @item @code{truncation}, @code{continuation}.
3846 Used for truncation and continuation lines.
3847
3848 @item @code{up}, @code{down}, @code{top}, @code{bottom}, @code{top-bottom}
3849 Used when @code{indicate-buffer-boundaries} is non-@code{nil}:
3850 @code{up} and @code{down} indicate a buffer boundary lying above or
3851 below the window edge; @code{top} and @code{bottom} indicate the
3852 topmost and bottommost buffer text line; and @code{top-bottom}
3853 indicates where there is just one line of text in the buffer.
3854
3855 @item @code{empty-line}
3856 Used to indicate empty lines when @code{indicate-empty-lines} is
3857 non-@code{nil}.
3858
3859 @item @code{overlay-arrow}
3860 Used for overlay arrows (@pxref{Overlay Arrow}).
3861 @c Is this used anywhere?
3862 @c @item Unknown bitmap indicator:
3863 @c @code{unknown}.
3864 @end table
3865
3866 Each @var{bitmaps} value may be a list of symbols @code{(@var{left}
3867 @var{right} [@var{left1} @var{right1}])}. The @var{left} and
3868 @var{right} symbols specify the bitmaps shown in the left and/or right
3869 fringe, for the specific indicator. @var{left1} and @var{right1} are
3870 specific to the @code{bottom} and @code{top-bottom} indicators, and
3871 are used to indicate that the last text line has no final newline.
3872 Alternatively, @var{bitmaps} may be a single symbol which is used in
3873 both left and right fringes.
3874
3875 @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}, for a list of standard bitmap symbols and how
3876 to define your own. In addition, @code{nil} represents the empty
3877 bitmap (i.e., an indicator that is not shown).
3878
3879 When @code{fringe-indicator-alist} has a buffer-local value, and
3880 there is no bitmap defined for a logical indicator, or the bitmap is
3881 @code{t}, the corresponding value from the default value of
3882 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} is used.
3883 @end defvar
3884
3885 @node Fringe Cursors
3886 @subsection Fringe Cursors
3887 @cindex fringe cursors
3888 @cindex cursor, fringe
3889
3890 When a line is exactly as wide as the window, Emacs displays the
3891 cursor in the right fringe instead of using two lines. Different
3892 bitmaps are used to represent the cursor in the fringe depending on
3893 the current buffer's cursor type.
3894
3895 @defopt overflow-newline-into-fringe
3896 If this is non-@code{nil}, lines exactly as wide as the window (not
3897 counting the final newline character) are not continued. Instead,
3898 when point is at the end of the line, the cursor appears in the right
3899 fringe.
3900 @end defopt
3901
3902 @defvar fringe-cursor-alist
3903 This variable specifies the mapping from logical cursor type to the
3904 actual fringe bitmaps displayed in the right fringe. The value is an
3905 alist where each element has the form @code{(@var{cursor-type}
3906 . @var{bitmap})}, which means to use the fringe bitmap @var{bitmap} to
3907 display cursors of type @var{cursor-type}.
3908
3909 Each @var{cursor-type} should be one of @code{box}, @code{hollow},
3910 @code{bar}, @code{hbar}, or @code{hollow-small}. The first four have
3911 the same meanings as in the @code{cursor-type} frame parameter
3912 (@pxref{Cursor Parameters}). The @code{hollow-small} type is used
3913 instead of @code{hollow} when the normal @code{hollow-rectangle}
3914 bitmap is too tall to fit on a specific display line.
3915
3916 Each @var{bitmap} should be a symbol specifying the fringe bitmap to
3917 be displayed for that logical cursor type.
3918 @iftex
3919 See the next subsection for details.
3920 @end iftex
3921 @ifnottex
3922 @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}.
3923 @end ifnottex
3924
3925 @c FIXME: I can't find the fringes-indicator-alist variable. Maybe
3926 @c it should be fringe-indicator-alist or fringe-cursor-alist? --xfq
3927 When @code{fringe-cursor-alist} has a buffer-local value, and there is
3928 no bitmap defined for a cursor type, the corresponding value from the
3929 default value of @code{fringes-indicator-alist} is used.
3930 @end defvar
3931
3932 @node Fringe Bitmaps
3933 @subsection Fringe Bitmaps
3934 @cindex fringe bitmaps
3935 @cindex bitmaps, fringe
3936
3937 The @dfn{fringe bitmaps} are the actual bitmaps which represent the
3938 logical fringe indicators for truncated or continued lines, buffer
3939 boundaries, overlay arrows, etc. Each bitmap is represented by a
3940 symbol.
3941 @iftex
3942 These symbols are referred to by the variables
3943 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} and @code{fringe-cursor-alist},
3944 described in the previous subsections.
3945 @end iftex
3946 @ifnottex
3947 These symbols are referred to by the variable
3948 @code{fringe-indicator-alist}, which maps fringe indicators to bitmaps
3949 (@pxref{Fringe Indicators}), and the variable
3950 @code{fringe-cursor-alist}, which maps fringe cursors to bitmaps
3951 (@pxref{Fringe Cursors}).
3952 @end ifnottex
3953
3954 Lisp programs can also directly display a bitmap in the left or
3955 right fringe, by using a @code{display} property for one of the
3956 characters appearing in the line (@pxref{Other Display Specs}). Such
3957 a display specification has the form
3958
3959 @example
3960 (@var{fringe} @var{bitmap} [@var{face}])
3961 @end example
3962
3963 @noindent
3964 @var{fringe} is either the symbol @code{left-fringe} or
3965 @code{right-fringe}. @var{bitmap} is a symbol identifying the bitmap
3966 to display. The optional @var{face} names a face whose foreground
3967 color is used to display the bitmap; this face is automatically merged
3968 with the @code{fringe} face.
3969
3970 Here is a list of the standard fringe bitmaps defined in Emacs, and
3971 how they are currently used in Emacs (via
3972 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} and @code{fringe-cursor-alist}):
3973
3974 @table @asis
3975 @item @code{left-arrow}, @code{right-arrow}
3976 Used to indicate truncated lines.
3977
3978 @item @code{left-curly-arrow}, @code{right-curly-arrow}
3979 Used to indicate continued lines.
3980
3981 @item @code{right-triangle}, @code{left-triangle}
3982 The former is used by overlay arrows. The latter is unused.
3983
3984 @item @code{up-arrow}, @code{down-arrow}, @code{top-left-angle} @code{top-right-angle}
3985 @itemx @code{bottom-left-angle}, @code{bottom-right-angle}
3986 @itemx @code{top-right-angle}, @code{top-left-angle}
3987 @itemx @code{left-bracket}, @code{right-bracket}, @code{top-right-angle}, @code{top-left-angle}
3988 Used to indicate buffer boundaries.
3989
3990 @item @code{filled-rectangle}, @code{hollow-rectangle}
3991 @itemx @code{filled-square}, @code{hollow-square}
3992 @itemx @code{vertical-bar}, @code{horizontal-bar}
3993 Used for different types of fringe cursors.
3994
3995 @item @code{empty-line}, @code{exclamation-mark}, @code{question-mark}, @code{exclamation-mark}
3996 Not used by core Emacs features.
3997 @end table
3998
3999 @noindent
4000 The next subsection describes how to define your own fringe bitmaps.
4001
4002 @defun fringe-bitmaps-at-pos &optional pos window
4003 This function returns the fringe bitmaps of the display line
4004 containing position @var{pos} in window @var{window}. The return
4005 value has the form @code{(@var{left} @var{right} @var{ov})}, where @var{left}
4006 is the symbol for the fringe bitmap in the left fringe (or @code{nil}
4007 if no bitmap), @var{right} is similar for the right fringe, and @var{ov}
4008 is non-@code{nil} if there is an overlay arrow in the left fringe.
4009
4010 The value is @code{nil} if @var{pos} is not visible in @var{window}.
4011 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, that stands for the selected window.
4012 If @var{pos} is @code{nil}, that stands for the value of point in
4013 @var{window}.
4014 @end defun
4015
4016 @node Customizing Bitmaps
4017 @subsection Customizing Fringe Bitmaps
4018 @cindex fringe bitmaps, customizing
4019
4020 @defun define-fringe-bitmap bitmap bits &optional height width align
4021 This function defines the symbol @var{bitmap} as a new fringe bitmap,
4022 or replaces an existing bitmap with that name.
4023
4024 The argument @var{bits} specifies the image to use. It should be
4025 either a string or a vector of integers, where each element (an
4026 integer) corresponds to one row of the bitmap. Each bit of an integer
4027 corresponds to one pixel of the bitmap, where the low bit corresponds
4028 to the rightmost pixel of the bitmap.
4029
4030 The height is normally the length of @var{bits}. However, you
4031 can specify a different height with non-@code{nil} @var{height}. The width
4032 is normally 8, but you can specify a different width with non-@code{nil}
4033 @var{width}. The width must be an integer between 1 and 16.
4034
4035 The argument @var{align} specifies the positioning of the bitmap
4036 relative to the range of rows where it is used; the default is to
4037 center the bitmap. The allowed values are @code{top}, @code{center},
4038 or @code{bottom}.
4039
4040 The @var{align} argument may also be a list @code{(@var{align}
4041 @var{periodic})} where @var{align} is interpreted as described above.
4042 If @var{periodic} is non-@code{nil}, it specifies that the rows in
4043 @code{bits} should be repeated enough times to reach the specified
4044 height.
4045 @end defun
4046
4047 @defun destroy-fringe-bitmap bitmap
4048 This function destroy the fringe bitmap identified by @var{bitmap}.
4049 If @var{bitmap} identifies a standard fringe bitmap, it actually
4050 restores the standard definition of that bitmap, instead of
4051 eliminating it entirely.
4052 @end defun
4053
4054 @defun set-fringe-bitmap-face bitmap &optional face
4055 This sets the face for the fringe bitmap @var{bitmap} to @var{face}.
4056 If @var{face} is @code{nil}, it selects the @code{fringe} face. The
4057 bitmap's face controls the color to draw it in.
4058
4059 @var{face} is merged with the @code{fringe} face, so normally
4060 @var{face} should specify only the foreground color.
4061 @end defun
4062
4063 @node Overlay Arrow
4064 @subsection The Overlay Arrow
4065 @c @cindex overlay arrow Duplicates variable names
4066
4067 The @dfn{overlay arrow} is useful for directing the user's attention
4068 to a particular line in a buffer. For example, in the modes used for
4069 interface to debuggers, the overlay arrow indicates the line of code
4070 about to be executed. This feature has nothing to do with
4071 @dfn{overlays} (@pxref{Overlays}).
4072
4073 @defvar overlay-arrow-string
4074 This variable holds the string to display to call attention to a
4075 particular line, or @code{nil} if the arrow feature is not in use.
4076 On a graphical display the contents of the string are ignored; instead a
4077 glyph is displayed in the fringe area to the left of the display area.
4078 @end defvar
4079
4080 @defvar overlay-arrow-position
4081 This variable holds a marker that indicates where to display the overlay
4082 arrow. It should point at the beginning of a line. On a non-graphical
4083 display the arrow text
4084 appears at the beginning of that line, overlaying any text that would
4085 otherwise appear. Since the arrow is usually short, and the line
4086 usually begins with indentation, normally nothing significant is
4087 overwritten.
4088
4089 The overlay-arrow string is displayed in any given buffer if the value
4090 of @code{overlay-arrow-position} in that buffer points into that
4091 buffer. Thus, it is possible to display multiple overlay arrow strings
4092 by creating buffer-local bindings of @code{overlay-arrow-position}.
4093 However, it is usually cleaner to use
4094 @code{overlay-arrow-variable-list} to achieve this result.
4095 @c !!! overlay-arrow-position: but the overlay string may remain in the display
4096 @c of some other buffer until an update is required. This should be fixed
4097 @c now. Is it?
4098 @end defvar
4099
4100 You can do a similar job by creating an overlay with a
4101 @code{before-string} property. @xref{Overlay Properties}.
4102
4103 You can define multiple overlay arrows via the variable
4104 @code{overlay-arrow-variable-list}.
4105
4106 @defvar overlay-arrow-variable-list
4107 This variable's value is a list of variables, each of which specifies
4108 the position of an overlay arrow. The variable
4109 @code{overlay-arrow-position} has its normal meaning because it is on
4110 this list.
4111 @end defvar
4112
4113 Each variable on this list can have properties
4114 @code{overlay-arrow-string} and @code{overlay-arrow-bitmap} that
4115 specify an overlay arrow string (for text terminals) or fringe bitmap
4116 (for graphical terminals) to display at the corresponding overlay
4117 arrow position. If either property is not set, the default
4118 @code{overlay-arrow-string} or @code{overlay-arrow} fringe indicator
4119 is used.
4120
4121
4122 @node Scroll Bars
4123 @section Scroll Bars
4124 @cindex scroll bars
4125
4126 Normally the frame parameter @code{vertical-scroll-bars} controls
4127 whether the windows in the frame have vertical scroll bars, and whether
4128 they are on the left or right. The frame parameter
4129 @code{scroll-bar-width} specifies how wide they are (@code{nil} meaning
4130 the default).
4131
4132 The frame parameter @code{horizontal-scroll-bars} controls whether
4133 the windows in the frame have horizontal scroll bars. The frame
4134 parameter @code{scroll-bar-height} specifies how high they are
4135 (@code{nil} meaning the default). @xref{Layout Parameters}.
4136
4137 @vindex horizontal-scroll-bars-available-p
4138 Horizontal scroll bars are not available on all platforms. The
4139 function @code{horizontal-scroll-bars-available-p} which takes no
4140 argument returns non-@code{nil} if they are available on your system.
4141
4142 The following three functions take as argument a live frame which
4143 defaults to the selected one.
4144
4145 @defun frame-current-scroll-bars &optional frame
4146 This function reports the scroll bar types for frame @var{frame}. The
4147 value is a cons cell @code{(@var{vertical-type} .@:
4148 @var{horizontal-type})}, where @var{vertical-type} is either
4149 @code{left}, @code{right}, or @code{nil} (which means no vertical scroll
4150 bar.) @var{horizontal-type} is either @code{bottom} or @code{nil}
4151 (which means no horizontal scroll bar).
4152 @end defun
4153
4154 @defun frame-scroll-bar-width &optional Lisp_Object &optional frame
4155 This function returns the width of vertical scroll bars of @var{frame}
4156 in pixels.
4157 @end defun
4158
4159 @defun frame-scroll-bar-height &optional Lisp_Object &optional frame
4160 This function returns the height of horizontal scroll bars of
4161 @var{frame} in pixels.
4162 @end defun
4163
4164 You can override the frame specific settings for individual windows by
4165 using the following function:
4166
4167 @defun set-window-scroll-bars window &optional width vertical-type height horizontal-type
4168 This function sets the width and/or height and the types of scroll bars
4169 for window @var{window}.
4170
4171 @var{width} specifies the width of the vertical scroll bar in pixels
4172 (@code{nil} means use the width specified for the frame).
4173 @var{vertical-type} specifies whether to have a vertical scroll bar and,
4174 if so, where. The possible values are @code{left}, @code{right},
4175 @code{t}, which means to use the frame's default, and @code{nil} for no
4176 vertical scroll bar.
4177
4178 @var{height} specifies the height of the horizontal scroll bar in pixels
4179 (@code{nil} means use the height specified for the frame).
4180 @var{horizontal-type} specifies whether to have a horizontal scroll bar.
4181 The possible values are @code{bottom}, @code{t}, which means to use the
4182 frame's default, and @code{nil} for no horizontal scroll bar.
4183
4184 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the selected window is used.
4185 @end defun
4186
4187 The following four functions take as argument a live window which
4188 defaults to the selected one.
4189
4190 @defun window-scroll-bars &optional window
4191 This function returns a list of the form @code{(@var{width}
4192 @var{columns} @var{vertical-type} @var{height} @var{lines}
4193 @var{horizontal-type})}.
4194
4195 The value @var{width} is the value that was specified for the width of
4196 the vertical scroll bar (which may be @code{nil}); @var{columns} is the
4197 (possibly rounded) number of columns that the vertical scroll bar
4198 actually occupies.
4199
4200 The value @var{height} is the value that was specified for the height of
4201 the horizontal scroll bar (which may be @code{nil}); @var{lines} is the
4202 (possibly rounded) number of lines that the horizontally scroll bar
4203 actually occupies.
4204 @end defun
4205
4206 @defun window-current-scroll-bars &optional window
4207 This function reports the scroll bar type for window @var{window}. The
4208 value is a cons cell @code{(@var{vertical-type} .@:
4209 @var{horizontal-type})}. Unlike @code{window-scroll-bars}, this reports
4210 the scroll bar type actually used, once frame defaults and
4211 @code{scroll-bar-mode} are taken into account.
4212 @end defun
4213
4214 @defun window-scroll-bar-width &optional window
4215 This function returns the width in pixels of @var{window}'s vertical
4216 scrollbar.
4217 @end defun
4218
4219 @defun window-scroll-bar-height &optional window
4220 This function returns the height in pixels of @var{window}'s horizontal
4221 scrollbar.
4222 @end defun
4223
4224 If you don't specify these values for a window with
4225 @code{set-window-scroll-bars}, the buffer-local variables
4226 @code{vertical-scroll-bar}, @code{horizontal-scroll-bar},
4227 @code{scroll-bar-width} and @code{scroll-bar-height} in the buffer being
4228 displayed control the window's scroll bars. The function
4229 @code{set-window-buffer} examines these variables. If you change them
4230 in a buffer that is already visible in a window, you can make the window
4231 take note of the new values by calling @code{set-window-buffer}
4232 specifying the same buffer that is already displayed.
4233
4234 You can control the appearance of scroll bars for a particular buffer by
4235 setting the following variables which automatically become buffer-local
4236 when set.
4237
4238 @defvar vertical-scroll-bar
4239 This variable specifies the location of the vertical scroll bar. The
4240 possible values are @code{left}, @code{right}, @code{t}, which means to
4241 use the frame's default, and @code{nil} for no scroll bar.
4242 @end defvar
4243
4244 @defvar horizontal-scroll-bar
4245 This variable specifies the location of the horizontal scroll bar. The
4246 possible values are @code{bottom}, @code{t}, which means to use the
4247 frame's default, and @code{nil} for no scroll bar.
4248 @end defvar
4249
4250 @defvar scroll-bar-width
4251 This variable specifies the width of the buffer's vertical scroll bars,
4252 measured in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the value
4253 specified by the frame.
4254 @end defvar
4255
4256 @defvar scroll-bar-height
4257 This variable specifies the height of the buffer's horizontal scroll
4258 bar, measured in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the value
4259 specified by the frame.
4260 @end defvar
4261
4262 Finally you can toggle the display of scroll bars on all frames by
4263 customizing the variables @code{scroll-bar-mode} and
4264 @code{horizontal-scroll-bar-mode}.
4265
4266 @defopt scroll-bar-mode
4267 This variable controls whether and where to put vertical scroll bars in
4268 all frames. The possible values are @code{nil} for no scroll bars,
4269 @code{left} to put scroll bars on the left and @code{right} to put
4270 scroll bars on the right.
4271 @end defopt
4272
4273 @defopt horizontal-scroll-bar-mode
4274 This variable controls whether to display horizontal scroll bars on all
4275 frames.
4276 @end defopt
4277
4278
4279 @node Window Dividers
4280 @section Window Dividers
4281 @cindex window dividers
4282 @cindex right dividers
4283 @cindex bottom dividers
4284
4285 Window dividers are bars drawn between a frame's windows. A right
4286 divider is drawn between a window and any adjacent windows on the right.
4287 Its width (thickness) is specified by the frame parameter
4288 @code{right-divider-width}. A bottom divider is drawn between a
4289 window and adjacent windows on the bottom or the echo area. Its width
4290 is specified by the frame parameter @code{bottom-divider-width}. In
4291 either case, specifying a width of zero means to not draw such dividers.
4292 @xref{Layout Parameters}.
4293
4294 Technically, a right divider belongs to the window on its left,
4295 which means that its width contributes to the total width of that
4296 window. A bottom divider belongs to the window above it, which
4297 means that its width contributes to the total height of that window.
4298 @xref{Window Sizes}. When a window has both, a right and a bottom
4299 divider, the bottom divider prevails. This means that a bottom
4300 divider is drawn over the full total width of its window while the right
4301 divider ends above the bottom divider.
4302
4303 Dividers can be dragged with the mouse and are therefore useful for
4304 adjusting the sizes of adjacent windows with the mouse. They also serve
4305 to visually set apart adjacent windows when no scroll bars or mode lines
4306 are present. The following three faces allow the customization of the
4307 appearance of dividers:
4308
4309 @table @code
4310 @item window-divider
4311 When a divider is less than three pixels wide, it is drawn solidly with
4312 the foreground of this face. For larger dividers this face is used for
4313 the inner part only, excluding the first and last pixel.
4314
4315 @item window-divider-first-pixel
4316 This is the face used for drawing the first pixel of a divider that is
4317 at least three pixels wide. To obtain a solid appearance, set this to
4318 the same value used for the @code{window-divider} face.
4319
4320 @item window-divider-last-pixel
4321 This is the face used for drawing the last pixel of a divider that is at
4322 least three pixels wide. To obtain a solid appearance, set this to the
4323 same value used for the @code{window-divider} face.
4324 @end table
4325
4326 You can get the sizes of the dividers of a specific window with the
4327 following two functions.
4328
4329 @defun window-right-divider-width &optional window
4330 Return the width (thickness) in pixels of @var{window}'s right divider.
4331 @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
4332 The return value is always zero for a rightmost window.
4333 @end defun
4334
4335 @defun window-bottom-divider-width &optional window
4336 Return the width (thickness) in pixels of @var{window}'s bottom divider.
4337 @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
4338 The return value is zero for the minibuffer window or a bottommost
4339 window on a minibuffer-less frame.
4340 @end defun
4341
4342
4343 @node Display Property
4344 @section The @code{display} Property
4345 @cindex display specification
4346 @kindex display @r{(text property)}
4347
4348 The @code{display} text property (or overlay property) is used to
4349 insert images into text, and to control other aspects of how text
4350 displays. The value of the @code{display} property should be a
4351 display specification, or a list or vector containing several display
4352 specifications. Display specifications in the same @code{display}
4353 property value generally apply in parallel to the text they cover.
4354
4355 If several sources (overlays and/or a text property) specify values
4356 for the @code{display} property, only one of the values takes effect,
4357 following the rules of @code{get-char-property}. @xref{Examining
4358 Properties}.
4359
4360 The rest of this section describes several kinds of
4361 display specifications and what they mean.
4362
4363 @menu
4364 * Replacing Specs:: Display specs that replace the text.
4365 * Specified Space:: Displaying one space with a specified width.
4366 * Pixel Specification:: Specifying space width or height in pixels.
4367 * Other Display Specs:: Displaying an image; adjusting the height,
4368 spacing, and other properties of text.
4369 * Display Margins:: Displaying text or images to the side of the main text.
4370 @end menu
4371
4372 @node Replacing Specs
4373 @subsection Display Specs That Replace The Text
4374 @cindex replacing display specs
4375
4376 Some kinds of display specifications specify something to display
4377 instead of the text that has the property. These are called
4378 @dfn{replacing} display specifications. Emacs does not allow the user
4379 to interactively move point into the middle of buffer text that is
4380 replaced in this way.
4381
4382 If a list of display specifications includes more than one replacing
4383 display specification, the first overrides the rest. Replacing
4384 display specifications make most other display specifications
4385 irrelevant, since those don't apply to the replacement.
4386
4387 For replacing display specifications, @dfn{the text that has the
4388 property} means all the consecutive characters that have the same
4389 Lisp object as their @code{display} property; these characters are
4390 replaced as a single unit. If two characters have different Lisp
4391 objects as their @code{display} properties (i.e., objects which are
4392 not @code{eq}), they are handled separately.
4393
4394 Here is an example which illustrates this point. A string serves as
4395 a replacing display specification, which replaces the text that has
4396 the property with the specified string (@pxref{Other Display Specs}).
4397 Consider the following function:
4398
4399 @smallexample
4400 (defun foo ()
4401 (dotimes (i 5)
4402 (let ((string (concat "A"))
4403 (start (+ i i (point-min))))
4404 (put-text-property start (1+ start) 'display string)
4405 (put-text-property start (+ 2 start) 'display string))))
4406 @end smallexample
4407
4408 @noindent
4409 This function gives each of the first ten characters in the buffer a
4410 @code{display} property which is a string @code{"A"}, but they don't
4411 all get the same string object. The first two characters get the same
4412 string object, so they are replaced with one @samp{A}; the fact that
4413 the display property was assigned in two separate calls to
4414 @code{put-text-property} is irrelevant. Similarly, the next two
4415 characters get a second string (@code{concat} creates a new string
4416 object), so they are replaced with one @samp{A}; and so on. Thus, the
4417 ten characters appear as five A's.
4418
4419 @node Specified Space
4420 @subsection Specified Spaces
4421 @cindex spaces, specified height or width
4422 @cindex variable-width spaces
4423
4424 To display a space of specified width and/or height, use a display
4425 specification of the form @code{(space . @var{props})}, where
4426 @var{props} is a property list (a list of alternating properties and
4427 values). You can put this property on one or more consecutive
4428 characters; a space of the specified height and width is displayed in
4429 place of @emph{all} of those characters. These are the properties you
4430 can use in @var{props} to specify the weight of the space:
4431
4432 @table @code
4433 @item :width @var{width}
4434 If @var{width} is a number, it specifies
4435 that the space width should be @var{width} times the normal character
4436 width. @var{width} can also be a @dfn{pixel width} specification
4437 (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4438
4439 @item :relative-width @var{factor}
4440 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4441 first character in the group of consecutive characters that have the
4442 same @code{display} property. The space width is the pixel width of
4443 that character, multiplied by @var{factor}. (On text-mode terminals,
4444 the ``pixel width'' of a character is usually 1, but it could be more
4445 for TABs and double-width CJK characters.)
4446
4447 @item :align-to @var{hpos}
4448 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach @var{hpos}.
4449 If @var{hpos} is a number, it is measured in units of the normal
4450 character width. @var{hpos} can also be a @dfn{pixel width}
4451 specification (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4452 @end table
4453
4454 You should use one and only one of the above properties. You can
4455 also specify the height of the space, with these properties:
4456
4457 @table @code
4458 @item :height @var{height}
4459 Specifies the height of the space.
4460 If @var{height} is a number, it specifies
4461 that the space height should be @var{height} times the normal character
4462 height. The @var{height} may also be a @dfn{pixel height} specification
4463 (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4464
4465 @item :relative-height @var{factor}
4466 Specifies the height of the space, multiplying the ordinary height
4467 of the text having this display specification by @var{factor}.
4468
4469 @item :ascent @var{ascent}
4470 If the value of @var{ascent} is a non-negative number no greater than
4471 100, it specifies that @var{ascent} percent of the height of the space
4472 should be considered as the ascent of the space---that is, the part
4473 above the baseline. The ascent may also be specified in pixel units
4474 with a @dfn{pixel ascent} specification (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4475
4476 @end table
4477
4478 Don't use both @code{:height} and @code{:relative-height} together.
4479
4480 The @code{:width} and @code{:align-to} properties are supported on
4481 non-graphic terminals, but the other space properties in this section
4482 are not.
4483
4484 Note that space properties are treated as paragraph separators for
4485 the purposes of reordering bidirectional text for display.
4486 @xref{Bidirectional Display}, for the details.
4487
4488 @node Pixel Specification
4489 @subsection Pixel Specification for Spaces
4490 @cindex spaces, pixel specification
4491
4492 The value of the @code{:width}, @code{:align-to}, @code{:height},
4493 and @code{:ascent} properties can be a special kind of expression that
4494 is evaluated during redisplay. The result of the evaluation is used
4495 as an absolute number of pixels.
4496
4497 The following expressions are supported:
4498
4499 @smallexample
4500 @group
4501 @var{expr} ::= @var{num} | (@var{num}) | @var{unit} | @var{elem} | @var{pos} | @var{image} | @var{form}
4502 @var{num} ::= @var{integer} | @var{float} | @var{symbol}
4503 @var{unit} ::= in | mm | cm | width | height
4504 @end group
4505 @group
4506 @var{elem} ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin
4507 | scroll-bar | text
4508 @var{pos} ::= left | center | right
4509 @var{form} ::= (@var{num} . @var{expr}) | (@var{op} @var{expr} ...)
4510 @var{op} ::= + | -
4511 @end group
4512 @end smallexample
4513
4514 The form @var{num} specifies a fraction of the default frame font
4515 height or width. The form @code{(@var{num})} specifies an absolute
4516 number of pixels. If @var{num} is a symbol, @var{symbol}, its
4517 buffer-local variable binding is used.
4518
4519 The @code{in}, @code{mm}, and @code{cm} units specify the number of
4520 pixels per inch, millimeter, and centimeter, respectively. The
4521 @code{width} and @code{height} units correspond to the default width
4522 and height of the current face. An image specification @code{image}
4523 corresponds to the width or height of the image.
4524
4525 The elements @code{left-fringe}, @code{right-fringe},
4526 @code{left-margin}, @code{right-margin}, @code{scroll-bar}, and
4527 @code{text} specify to the width of the corresponding area of the
4528 window.
4529
4530 The @code{left}, @code{center}, and @code{right} positions can be
4531 used with @code{:align-to} to specify a position relative to the left
4532 edge, center, or right edge of the text area.
4533
4534 Any of the above window elements (except @code{text}) can also be
4535 used with @code{:align-to} to specify that the position is relative to
4536 the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for a relative
4537 position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of these
4538 symbols), further occurrences of these symbols are interpreted as the
4539 width of the specified area. For example, to align to the center of
4540 the left-margin, use
4541
4542 @example
4543 :align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin))
4544 @end example
4545
4546 If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative
4547 to the left edge of the text area. For example, @samp{:align-to 0} in a
4548 header-line aligns with the first text column in the text area.
4549
4550 A value of the form @code{(@var{num} . @var{expr})} stands for the
4551 product of the values of @var{num} and @var{expr}. For example,
4552 @code{(2 . in)} specifies a width of 2 inches, while @code{(0.5 .
4553 @var{image})} specifies half the width (or height) of the specified
4554 image.
4555
4556 The form @code{(+ @var{expr} ...)} adds up the value of the
4557 expressions. The form @code{(- @var{expr} ...)} negates or subtracts
4558 the value of the expressions.
4559
4560 @node Other Display Specs
4561 @subsection Other Display Specifications
4562
4563 Here are the other sorts of display specifications that you can use
4564 in the @code{display} text property.
4565
4566 @table @code
4567 @item @var{string}
4568 Display @var{string} instead of the text that has this property.
4569
4570 Recursive display specifications are not supported---@var{string}'s
4571 @code{display} properties, if any, are not used.
4572
4573 @item (image . @var{image-props})
4574 This kind of display specification is an image descriptor (@pxref{Images}).
4575 When used as a display specification, it means to display the image
4576 instead of the text that has the display specification.
4577
4578 @item (slice @var{x} @var{y} @var{width} @var{height})
4579 This specification together with @code{image} specifies a @dfn{slice}
4580 (a partial area) of the image to display. The elements @var{y} and
4581 @var{x} specify the top left corner of the slice, within the image;
4582 @var{width} and @var{height} specify the width and height of the
4583 slice. Integers are numbers of pixels. A floating-point number
4584 in the range 0.0--1.0 stands for that fraction of the width or height
4585 of the entire image.
4586
4587 @item ((margin nil) @var{string})
4588 A display specification of this form means to display @var{string}
4589 instead of the text that has the display specification, at the same
4590 position as that text. It is equivalent to using just @var{string},
4591 but it is done as a special case of marginal display (@pxref{Display
4592 Margins}).
4593
4594 @item (left-fringe @var{bitmap} @r{[}@var{face}@r{]})
4595 @itemx (right-fringe @var{bitmap} @r{[}@var{face}@r{]})
4596 This display specification on any character of a line of text causes
4597 the specified @var{bitmap} be displayed in the left or right fringes
4598 for that line, instead of the characters that have the display
4599 specification. The optional @var{face} specifies the colors to be
4600 used for the bitmap. @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}, for the details.
4601
4602 @item (space-width @var{factor})
4603 This display specification affects all the space characters within the
4604 text that has the specification. It displays all of these spaces
4605 @var{factor} times as wide as normal. The element @var{factor} should
4606 be an integer or float. Characters other than spaces are not affected
4607 at all; in particular, this has no effect on tab characters.
4608
4609 @item (height @var{height})
4610 This display specification makes the text taller or shorter.
4611 Here are the possibilities for @var{height}:
4612
4613 @table @asis
4614 @item @code{(+ @var{n})}
4615 @c FIXME: Add an index for "step"? --xfq
4616 This means to use a font that is @var{n} steps larger. A @dfn{step} is
4617 defined by the set of available fonts---specifically, those that match
4618 what was otherwise specified for this text, in all attributes except
4619 height. Each size for which a suitable font is available counts as
4620 another step. @var{n} should be an integer.
4621
4622 @item @code{(- @var{n})}
4623 This means to use a font that is @var{n} steps smaller.
4624
4625 @item a number, @var{factor}
4626 A number, @var{factor}, means to use a font that is @var{factor} times
4627 as tall as the default font.
4628
4629 @item a symbol, @var{function}
4630 A symbol is a function to compute the height. It is called with the
4631 current height as argument, and should return the new height to use.
4632
4633 @item anything else, @var{form}
4634 If the @var{height} value doesn't fit the previous possibilities, it is
4635 a form. Emacs evaluates it to get the new height, with the symbol
4636 @code{height} bound to the current specified font height.
4637 @end table
4638
4639 @item (raise @var{factor})
4640 This kind of display specification raises or lowers the text
4641 it applies to, relative to the baseline of the line.
4642
4643 @var{factor} must be a number, which is interpreted as a multiple of the
4644 height of the affected text. If it is positive, that means to display
4645 the characters raised. If it is negative, that means to display them
4646 lower down.
4647
4648 If the text also has a @code{height} display specification, that does
4649 not affect the amount of raising or lowering, which is based on the
4650 faces used for the text.
4651 @end table
4652
4653 @c We put all the '@code{(when ...)}' on one line to encourage
4654 @c makeinfo's end-of-sentence heuristics to DTRT. Previously, the dot
4655 @c was at eol; the info file ended up w/ two spaces rendered after it.
4656 You can make any display specification conditional. To do that,
4657 package it in another list of the form
4658 @code{(when @var{condition} . @var{spec})}.
4659 Then the specification @var{spec} applies only when
4660 @var{condition} evaluates to a non-@code{nil} value. During the
4661 evaluation, @code{object} is bound to the string or buffer having the
4662 conditional @code{display} property. @code{position} and
4663 @code{buffer-position} are bound to the position within @code{object}
4664 and the buffer position where the @code{display} property was found,
4665 respectively. Both positions can be different when @code{object} is a
4666 string.
4667
4668 @node Display Margins
4669 @subsection Displaying in the Margins
4670 @cindex display margins
4671 @cindex margins, display
4672
4673 A buffer can have blank areas called @dfn{display margins} on the
4674 left and on the right. Ordinary text never appears in these areas,
4675 but you can put things into the display margins using the
4676 @code{display} property. There is currently no way to make text or
4677 images in the margin mouse-sensitive.
4678
4679 The way to display something in the margins is to specify it in a
4680 margin display specification in the @code{display} property of some
4681 text. This is a replacing display specification, meaning that the
4682 text you put it on does not get displayed; the margin display appears,
4683 but that text does not.
4684
4685 A margin display specification looks like @code{((margin
4686 right-margin) @var{spec})} or @code{((margin left-margin) @var{spec})}.
4687 Here, @var{spec} is another display specification that says what to
4688 display in the margin. Typically it is a string of text to display,
4689 or an image descriptor.
4690
4691 To display something in the margin @emph{in association with}
4692 certain buffer text, without altering or preventing the display of
4693 that text, put a @code{before-string} property on the text and put the
4694 margin display specification on the contents of the before-string.
4695
4696 Before the display margins can display anything, you must give
4697 them a nonzero width. The usual way to do that is to set these
4698 variables:
4699
4700 @defvar left-margin-width
4701 This variable specifies the width of the left margin, in character
4702 cell (a.k.a.@: ``column'') units. It is buffer-local in all buffers.
4703 A value of @code{nil} means no left marginal area.
4704 @end defvar
4705
4706 @defvar right-margin-width
4707 This variable specifies the width of the right margin, in character
4708 cell units. It is buffer-local in all buffers. A value of @code{nil}
4709 means no right marginal area.
4710 @end defvar
4711
4712 Setting these variables does not immediately affect the window. These
4713 variables are checked when a new buffer is displayed in the window.
4714 Thus, you can make changes take effect by calling
4715 @code{set-window-buffer}.
4716
4717 You can also set the margin widths immediately.
4718
4719 @defun set-window-margins window left &optional right
4720 This function specifies the margin widths for window @var{window}, in
4721 character cell units. The argument @var{left} controls the left
4722 margin, and @var{right} controls the right margin (default @code{0}).
4723 @end defun
4724
4725 @defun window-margins &optional window
4726 This function returns the width of the left and right margins of
4727 @var{window} as a cons cell of the form @w{@code{(@var{left}
4728 . @var{right})}}. If one of the two marginal areas does not exist,
4729 its width is returned as @code{nil}; if neither of the two margins exist,
4730 the function returns @code{(nil)}. If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the
4731 selected window is used.
4732 @end defun
4733
4734 @node Images
4735 @section Images
4736 @cindex images in buffers
4737
4738 To display an image in an Emacs buffer, you must first create an image
4739 descriptor, then use it as a display specifier in the @code{display}
4740 property of text that is displayed (@pxref{Display Property}).
4741
4742 Emacs is usually able to display images when it is run on a
4743 graphical terminal. Images cannot be displayed in a text terminal, on
4744 certain graphical terminals that lack the support for this, or if
4745 Emacs is compiled without image support. You can use the function
4746 @code{display-images-p} to determine if images can in principle be
4747 displayed (@pxref{Display Feature Testing}).
4748
4749 @menu
4750 * Image Formats:: Supported image formats.
4751 * Image Descriptors:: How to specify an image for use in @code{:display}.
4752 * XBM Images:: Special features for XBM format.
4753 * XPM Images:: Special features for XPM format.
4754 * PostScript Images:: Special features for PostScript format.
4755 * ImageMagick Images:: Special features available through ImageMagick.
4756 * Other Image Types:: Various other formats are supported.
4757 * Defining Images:: Convenient ways to define an image for later use.
4758 * Showing Images:: Convenient ways to display an image once it is defined.
4759 * Multi-Frame Images:: Some images contain more than one frame.
4760 * Image Cache:: Internal mechanisms of image display.
4761 @end menu
4762
4763 @node Image Formats
4764 @subsection Image Formats
4765 @cindex image formats
4766 @cindex image types
4767
4768 Emacs can display a number of different image formats. Some of
4769 these image formats are supported only if particular support libraries
4770 are installed. On some platforms, Emacs can load support libraries on
4771 demand; if so, the variable @code{dynamic-library-alist} can be used
4772 to modify the set of known names for these dynamic libraries.
4773 @xref{Dynamic Libraries}.
4774
4775 Supported image formats (and the required support libraries) include
4776 PBM and XBM (which do not depend on support libraries and are always
4777 available), XPM (@code{libXpm}), GIF (@code{libgif} or
4778 @code{libungif}), PostScript (@code{gs}), JPEG (@code{libjpeg}), TIFF
4779 (@code{libtiff}), PNG (@code{libpng}), and SVG (@code{librsvg}).
4780
4781 Each of these image formats is associated with an @dfn{image type
4782 symbol}. The symbols for the above formats are, respectively,
4783 @code{pbm}, @code{xbm}, @code{xpm}, @code{gif}, @code{postscript},
4784 @code{jpeg}, @code{tiff}, @code{png}, and @code{svg}.
4785
4786 Furthermore, if you build Emacs with ImageMagick
4787 (@code{libMagickWand}) support, Emacs can display any image format
4788 that ImageMagick can. @xref{ImageMagick Images}. All images
4789 displayed via ImageMagick have type symbol @code{imagemagick}.
4790
4791 @defvar image-types
4792 This variable contains a list of type symbols for image formats which
4793 are potentially supported in the current configuration.
4794
4795 ``Potentially'' means that Emacs knows about the image types, not
4796 necessarily that they can be used (for example, they could depend on
4797 unavailable dynamic libraries). To know which image types are really
4798 available, use @code{image-type-available-p}.
4799 @end defvar
4800
4801 @defun image-type-available-p type
4802 This function returns non-@code{nil} if images of type @var{type} can
4803 be loaded and displayed. @var{type} must be an image type symbol.
4804
4805 For image types whose support libraries are statically linked, this
4806 function always returns @code{t}. For image types whose support
4807 libraries are dynamically loaded, it returns @code{t} if the library
4808 could be loaded and @code{nil} otherwise.
4809 @end defun
4810
4811 @node Image Descriptors
4812 @subsection Image Descriptors
4813 @cindex image descriptor
4814
4815 An @dfn{image descriptor} is a list which specifies the underlying
4816 data for an image, and how to display it. It is typically used as the
4817 value of a @code{display} overlay or text property (@pxref{Other
4818 Display Specs}); but @xref{Showing Images}, for convenient helper
4819 functions to insert images into buffers.
4820
4821 Each image descriptor has the form @code{(image . @var{props})},
4822 where @var{props} is a property list of alternating keyword symbols
4823 and values, including at least the pair @code{:type @var{type}} that
4824 specifies the image type.
4825
4826 The following is a list of properties that are meaningful for all
4827 image types (there are also properties which are meaningful only for
4828 certain image types, as documented in the following subsections):
4829
4830 @table @code
4831 @item :type @var{type}
4832 The image type.
4833 @ifnottex
4834 @xref{Image Formats}.
4835 @end ifnottex
4836 Every image descriptor must include this property.
4837
4838 @item :file @var{file}
4839 This says to load the image from file @var{file}. If @var{file} is
4840 not an absolute file name, it is expanded in @code{data-directory}.
4841
4842 @item :data @var{data}
4843 This specifies the raw image data. Each image descriptor must have
4844 either @code{:data} or @code{:file}, but not both.
4845
4846 For most image types, the value of a @code{:data} property should be a
4847 string containing the image data. Some image types do not support
4848 @code{:data}; for some others, @code{:data} alone is not enough, so
4849 you need to use other image properties along with @code{:data}. See
4850 the following subsections for details.
4851
4852 @item :margin @var{margin}
4853 This specifies how many pixels to add as an extra margin around the
4854 image. The value, @var{margin}, must be a non-negative number, or a
4855 pair @code{(@var{x} . @var{y})} of such numbers. If it is a pair,
4856 @var{x} specifies how many pixels to add horizontally, and @var{y}
4857 specifies how many pixels to add vertically. If @code{:margin} is not
4858 specified, the default is zero.
4859
4860 @item :ascent @var{ascent}
4861 This specifies the amount of the image's height to use for its
4862 ascent---that is, the part above the baseline. The value,
4863 @var{ascent}, must be a number in the range 0 to 100, or the symbol
4864 @code{center}.
4865
4866 If @var{ascent} is a number, that percentage of the image's height is
4867 used for its ascent.
4868
4869 If @var{ascent} is @code{center}, the image is vertically centered
4870 around a centerline which would be the vertical centerline of text drawn
4871 at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
4872 properties and overlays that apply to the image.
4873
4874 If this property is omitted, it defaults to 50.
4875
4876 @item :relief @var{relief}
4877 This adds a shadow rectangle around the image. The value,
4878 @var{relief}, specifies the width of the shadow lines, in pixels. If
4879 @var{relief} is negative, shadows are drawn so that the image appears
4880 as a pressed button; otherwise, it appears as an unpressed button.
4881
4882 @item :conversion @var{algorithm}
4883 This specifies a conversion algorithm that should be applied to the
4884 image before it is displayed; the value, @var{algorithm}, specifies
4885 which algorithm.
4886
4887 @table @code
4888 @item laplace
4889 @itemx emboss
4890 Specifies the Laplace edge detection algorithm, which blurs out small
4891 differences in color while highlighting larger differences. People
4892 sometimes consider this useful for displaying the image for a
4893 disabled button.
4894
4895 @item (edge-detection :matrix @var{matrix} :color-adjust @var{adjust})
4896 @cindex edge detection, images
4897 Specifies a general edge-detection algorithm. @var{matrix} must be
4898 either a nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel
4899 at position @math{x/y} in the transformed image is computed from
4900 original pixels around that position. @var{matrix} specifies, for each
4901 pixel in the neighborhood of @math{x/y}, a factor with which that pixel
4902 will influence the transformed pixel; element @math{0} specifies the
4903 factor for the pixel at @math{x-1/y-1}, element @math{1} the factor for
4904 the pixel at @math{x/y-1} etc., as shown below:
4905 @iftex
4906 @tex
4907 $$\pmatrix{x-1/y-1 & x/y-1 & x+1/y-1 \cr
4908 x-1/y & x/y & x+1/y \cr
4909 x-1/y+1& x/y+1 & x+1/y+1 \cr}$$
4910 @end tex
4911 @end iftex
4912 @ifnottex
4913 @display
4914 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
4915 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
4916 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
4917 @end display
4918 @end ifnottex
4919
4920 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
4921 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
4922 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
4923 of the factors' absolute values.
4924
4925 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
4926 @iftex
4927 @tex
4928 $$\pmatrix{1 & 0 & 0 \cr
4929 0& 0 & 0 \cr
4930 0 & 0 & -1 \cr}$$
4931 @end tex
4932 @end iftex
4933 @ifnottex
4934 @display
4935 (1 0 0
4936 0 0 0
4937 0 0 -1)
4938 @end display
4939 @end ifnottex
4940
4941 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
4942 @iftex
4943 @tex
4944 $$\pmatrix{ 2 & -1 & 0 \cr
4945 -1 & 0 & 1 \cr
4946 0 & 1 & -2 \cr}$$
4947 @end tex
4948 @end iftex
4949 @ifnottex
4950 @display
4951 ( 2 -1 0
4952 -1 0 1
4953 0 1 -2)
4954 @end display
4955 @end ifnottex
4956
4957 @item disabled
4958 Specifies transforming the image so that it looks disabled.
4959 @end table
4960
4961 @item :mask @var{mask}
4962 If @var{mask} is @code{heuristic} or @code{(heuristic @var{bg})}, build
4963 a clipping mask for the image, so that the background of a frame is
4964 visible behind the image. If @var{bg} is not specified, or if @var{bg}
4965 is @code{t}, determine the background color of the image by looking at
4966 the four corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occurring
4967 color from the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise,
4968 @var{bg} must be a list @code{(@var{red} @var{green} @var{blue})}
4969 specifying the color to assume for the background of the image.
4970
4971 If @var{mask} is @code{nil}, remove a mask from the image, if it has
4972 one. Images in some formats include a mask which can be removed by
4973 specifying @code{:mask nil}.
4974
4975 @item :pointer @var{shape}
4976 This specifies the pointer shape when the mouse pointer is over this
4977 image. @xref{Pointer Shape}, for available pointer shapes.
4978
4979 @item :map @var{map}
4980 @cindex image maps
4981 This associates an image map of @dfn{hot spots} with this image.
4982
4983 An image map is an alist where each element has the format
4984 @code{(@var{area} @var{id} @var{plist})}. An @var{area} is specified
4985 as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon.
4986
4987 A rectangle is a cons
4988 @code{(rect . ((@var{x0} . @var{y0}) . (@var{x1} . @var{y1})))}
4989 which specifies the pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right
4990 corners of the rectangle area.
4991
4992 A circle is a cons
4993 @code{(circle . ((@var{x0} . @var{y0}) . @var{r}))}
4994 which specifies the center and the radius of the circle; @var{r} may
4995 be a float or integer.
4996
4997 A polygon is a cons
4998 @code{(poly . [@var{x0} @var{y0} @var{x1} @var{y1} ...])}
4999 where each pair in the vector describes one corner in the polygon.
5000
5001 When the mouse pointer lies on a hot-spot area of an image, the
5002 @var{plist} of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a @code{help-echo}
5003 property, that defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains
5004 a @code{pointer} property, that defines the shape of the mouse cursor when
5005 it is on the hot-spot.
5006 @xref{Pointer Shape}, for available pointer shapes.
5007
5008 When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot, an
5009 event is composed by combining the @var{id} of the hot-spot with the
5010 mouse event; for instance, @code{[area4 mouse-1]} if the hot-spot's
5011 @var{id} is @code{area4}.
5012 @end table
5013
5014 @defun image-mask-p spec &optional frame
5015 This function returns @code{t} if image @var{spec} has a mask bitmap.
5016 @var{frame} is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
5017 @var{frame} @code{nil} or omitted means to use the selected frame
5018 (@pxref{Input Focus}).
5019 @end defun
5020
5021 @node XBM Images
5022 @subsection XBM Images
5023 @cindex XBM
5024
5025 To use XBM format, specify @code{xbm} as the image type. This image
5026 format doesn't require an external library, so images of this type are
5027 always supported.
5028
5029 Additional image properties supported for the @code{xbm} image type are:
5030
5031 @table @code
5032 @item :foreground @var{foreground}
5033 The value, @var{foreground}, should be a string specifying the image
5034 foreground color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5035 used for each pixel in the XBM that is 1. The default is the frame's
5036 foreground color.
5037
5038 @item :background @var{background}
5039 The value, @var{background}, should be a string specifying the image
5040 background color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5041 used for each pixel in the XBM that is 0. The default is the frame's
5042 background color.
5043 @end table
5044
5045 If you specify an XBM image using data within Emacs instead of an
5046 external file, use the following three properties:
5047
5048 @table @code
5049 @item :data @var{data}
5050 The value, @var{data}, specifies the contents of the image.
5051 There are three formats you can use for @var{data}:
5052
5053 @itemize @bullet
5054 @item
5055 A vector of strings or bool-vectors, each specifying one line of the
5056 image. Do specify @code{:height} and @code{:width}.
5057
5058 @item
5059 A string containing the same byte sequence as an XBM file would contain.
5060 You must not specify @code{:height} and @code{:width} in this case,
5061 because omitting them is what indicates the data has the format of an
5062 XBM file. The file contents specify the height and width of the image.
5063
5064 @item
5065 A string or a bool-vector containing the bits of the image (plus perhaps
5066 some extra bits at the end that will not be used). It should contain at
5067 least @var{width} * @code{height} bits. In this case, you must specify
5068 @code{:height} and @code{:width}, both to indicate that the string
5069 contains just the bits rather than a whole XBM file, and to specify the
5070 size of the image.
5071 @end itemize
5072
5073 @item :width @var{width}
5074 The value, @var{width}, specifies the width of the image, in pixels.
5075
5076 @item :height @var{height}
5077 The value, @var{height}, specifies the height of the image, in pixels.
5078 @end table
5079
5080 @node XPM Images
5081 @subsection XPM Images
5082 @cindex XPM
5083
5084 To use XPM format, specify @code{xpm} as the image type. The
5085 additional image property @code{:color-symbols} is also meaningful with
5086 the @code{xpm} image type:
5087
5088 @table @code
5089 @item :color-symbols @var{symbols}
5090 The value, @var{symbols}, should be an alist whose elements have the
5091 form @code{(@var{name} . @var{color})}. In each element, @var{name} is
5092 the name of a color as it appears in the image file, and @var{color}
5093 specifies the actual color to use for displaying that name.
5094 @end table
5095
5096 @node PostScript Images
5097 @subsection PostScript Images
5098 @cindex postscript images
5099
5100 To use PostScript for an image, specify image type @code{postscript}.
5101 This works only if you have Ghostscript installed. You must always use
5102 these three properties:
5103
5104 @table @code
5105 @item :pt-width @var{width}
5106 The value, @var{width}, specifies the width of the image measured in
5107 points (1/72 inch). @var{width} must be an integer.
5108
5109 @item :pt-height @var{height}
5110 The value, @var{height}, specifies the height of the image in points
5111 (1/72 inch). @var{height} must be an integer.
5112
5113 @item :bounding-box @var{box}
5114 The value, @var{box}, must be a list or vector of four integers, which
5115 specifying the bounding box of the PostScript image, analogous to the
5116 @samp{BoundingBox} comment found in PostScript files.
5117
5118 @example
5119 %%BoundingBox: 22 171 567 738
5120 @end example
5121 @end table
5122
5123 @node ImageMagick Images
5124 @subsection ImageMagick Images
5125 @cindex ImageMagick images
5126 @cindex images, support for more formats
5127
5128 If you build Emacs with ImageMagick support, you can use the
5129 ImageMagick library to load many image formats (@pxref{File
5130 Conveniences,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}). The image type symbol
5131 for images loaded via ImageMagick is @code{imagemagick}, regardless of
5132 the actual underlying image format.
5133
5134 @defun imagemagick-types
5135 This function returns a list of image file extensions supported by the
5136 current ImageMagick installation. Each list element is a symbol
5137 representing an internal ImageMagick name for an image type, such as
5138 @code{BMP} for @file{.bmp} images.
5139 @end defun
5140
5141 @defopt imagemagick-enabled-types
5142 The value of this variable is a list of ImageMagick image types which
5143 Emacs may attempt to render using ImageMagick. Each list element
5144 should be one of the symbols in the list returned by
5145 @code{imagemagick-types}, or an equivalent string. Alternatively, a
5146 value of @code{t} enables ImageMagick for all possible image types.
5147 Regardless of the value of this variable,
5148 @code{imagemagick-types-inhibit} (see below) takes precedence.
5149 @end defopt
5150
5151 @defopt imagemagick-types-inhibit
5152 The value of this variable lists the ImageMagick image types which
5153 should never be rendered using ImageMagick, regardless of the value of
5154 @code{imagemagick-enabled-types}. A value of @code{t} disables
5155 ImageMagick entirely.
5156 @end defopt
5157
5158 @defvar image-format-suffixes
5159 This variable is an alist mapping image types to file name extensions.
5160 Emacs uses this in conjunction with the @code{:format} image property
5161 (see below) to give a hint to the ImageMagick library as to the type
5162 of an image. Each element has the form @code{(@var{type}
5163 @var{extension})}, where @var{type} is a symbol specifying an image
5164 content-type, and @var{extension} is a string that specifies the
5165 associated file name extension.
5166 @end defvar
5167
5168 Images loaded with ImageMagick support the following additional
5169 image descriptor properties:
5170
5171 @table @code
5172 @item :background @var{background}
5173 @var{background}, if non-@code{nil}, should be a string specifying a
5174 color, which is used as the image's background color if the image
5175 supports transparency. If the value is @code{nil}, it defaults to the
5176 frame's background color.
5177
5178 @item :width @var{width}, :height @var{height}
5179 The @code{:width} and @code{:height} keywords are used for scaling the
5180 image. If only one of them is specified, the other one will be
5181 calculated so as to preserve the aspect ratio. If both are specified,
5182 aspect ratio may not be preserved.
5183
5184 @item :max-width @var{max-width}, :max-height @var{max-height}
5185 The @code{:max-width} and @code{:max-height} keywords are used for
5186 scaling if the size of the image of the image exceeds these values.
5187 If @code{:width} is set it will have precedence over @code{max-width},
5188 and if @code{:height} is set it will have precedence over
5189 @code{max-height}, but you can otherwise mix these keywords as you
5190 wish. @code{:max-width} and @code{:max-height} will always preserve
5191 the aspect ratio.
5192
5193 @item :format @var{type}
5194 The value, @var{type}, should be a symbol specifying the type of the
5195 image data, as found in @code{image-format-suffixes}. This is used
5196 when the image does not have an associated file name, to provide a
5197 hint to ImageMagick to help it detect the image type.
5198
5199 @item :rotation @var{angle}
5200 Specifies a rotation angle in degrees.
5201
5202 @item :index @var{frame}
5203 @c Doesn't work: http://debbugs.gnu.org/7978
5204 @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5205 @end table
5206
5207 @node Other Image Types
5208 @subsection Other Image Types
5209 @cindex PBM
5210
5211 For PBM images, specify image type @code{pbm}. Color, gray-scale and
5212 monochromatic images are supported. For mono PBM images, two additional
5213 image properties are supported.
5214
5215 @table @code
5216 @item :foreground @var{foreground}
5217 The value, @var{foreground}, should be a string specifying the image
5218 foreground color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5219 used for each pixel in the PBM that is 1. The default is the frame's
5220 foreground color.
5221
5222 @item :background @var{background}
5223 The value, @var{background}, should be a string specifying the image
5224 background color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5225 used for each pixel in the PBM that is 0. The default is the frame's
5226 background color.
5227 @end table
5228
5229 @noindent
5230 The remaining image types that Emacs can support are:
5231
5232 @table @asis
5233 @item GIF
5234 Image type @code{gif}.
5235 Supports the @code{:index} property. @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5236
5237 @item JPEG
5238 Image type @code{jpeg}.
5239
5240 @item PNG
5241 Image type @code{png}.
5242
5243 @item SVG
5244 Image type @code{svg}.
5245
5246 @item TIFF
5247 Image type @code{tiff}.
5248 Supports the @code{:index} property. @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5249 @end table
5250
5251 @node Defining Images
5252 @subsection Defining Images
5253 @cindex define image
5254
5255 The functions @code{create-image}, @code{defimage} and
5256 @code{find-image} provide convenient ways to create image descriptors.
5257
5258 @defun create-image file-or-data &optional type data-p &rest props
5259 This function creates and returns an image descriptor which uses the
5260 data in @var{file-or-data}. @var{file-or-data} can be a file name or
5261 a string containing the image data; @var{data-p} should be @code{nil}
5262 for the former case, non-@code{nil} for the latter case.
5263
5264 The optional argument @var{type} is a symbol specifying the image type.
5265 If @var{type} is omitted or @code{nil}, @code{create-image} tries to
5266 determine the image type from the file's first few bytes, or else
5267 from the file's name.
5268
5269 The remaining arguments, @var{props}, specify additional image
5270 properties---for example,
5271
5272 @c ':heuristic-mask' is not documented?
5273 @example
5274 (create-image "foo.xpm" 'xpm nil :heuristic-mask t)
5275 @end example
5276
5277 The function returns @code{nil} if images of this type are not
5278 supported. Otherwise it returns an image descriptor.
5279 @end defun
5280
5281 @defmac defimage symbol specs &optional doc
5282 This macro defines @var{symbol} as an image name. The arguments
5283 @var{specs} is a list which specifies how to display the image.
5284 The third argument, @var{doc}, is an optional documentation string.
5285
5286 Each argument in @var{specs} has the form of a property list, and each
5287 one should specify at least the @code{:type} property and either the
5288 @code{:file} or the @code{:data} property. The value of @code{:type}
5289 should be a symbol specifying the image type, the value of
5290 @code{:file} is the file to load the image from, and the value of
5291 @code{:data} is a string containing the actual image data. Here is an
5292 example:
5293
5294 @example
5295 (defimage test-image
5296 ((:type xpm :file "~/test1.xpm")
5297 (:type xbm :file "~/test1.xbm")))
5298 @end example
5299
5300 @code{defimage} tests each argument, one by one, to see if it is
5301 usable---that is, if the type is supported and the file exists. The
5302 first usable argument is used to make an image descriptor which is
5303 stored in @var{symbol}.
5304
5305 If none of the alternatives will work, then @var{symbol} is defined
5306 as @code{nil}.
5307 @end defmac
5308
5309 @defun find-image specs
5310 This function provides a convenient way to find an image satisfying one
5311 of a list of image specifications @var{specs}.
5312
5313 Each specification in @var{specs} is a property list with contents
5314 depending on image type. All specifications must at least contain the
5315 properties @code{:type @var{type}} and either @w{@code{:file @var{file}}}
5316 or @w{@code{:data @var{data}}}, where @var{type} is a symbol specifying
5317 the image type, e.g., @code{xbm}, @var{file} is the file to load the
5318 image from, and @var{data} is a string containing the actual image data.
5319 The first specification in the list whose @var{type} is supported, and
5320 @var{file} exists, is used to construct the image specification to be
5321 returned. If no specification is satisfied, @code{nil} is returned.
5322
5323 The image is looked for in @code{image-load-path}.
5324 @end defun
5325
5326 @defvar image-load-path
5327 This variable's value is a list of locations in which to search for
5328 image files. If an element is a string or a variable symbol whose
5329 value is a string, the string is taken to be the name of a directory
5330 to search. If an element is a variable symbol whose value is a list,
5331 that is taken to be a list of directory names to search.
5332
5333 The default is to search in the @file{images} subdirectory of the
5334 directory specified by @code{data-directory}, then the directory
5335 specified by @code{data-directory}, and finally in the directories in
5336 @code{load-path}. Subdirectories are not automatically included in
5337 the search, so if you put an image file in a subdirectory, you have to
5338 supply the subdirectory name explicitly. For example, to find the
5339 image @file{images/foo/bar.xpm} within @code{data-directory}, you
5340 should specify the image as follows:
5341
5342 @example
5343 (defimage foo-image '((:type xpm :file "foo/bar.xpm")))
5344 @end example
5345 @end defvar
5346
5347 @defun image-load-path-for-library library image &optional path no-error
5348 This function returns a suitable search path for images used by the
5349 Lisp package @var{library}.
5350
5351 The function searches for @var{image} first using @code{image-load-path},
5352 excluding @file{@code{data-directory}/images}, and then in
5353 @code{load-path}, followed by a path suitable for @var{library}, which
5354 includes @file{../../etc/images} and @file{../etc/images} relative to
5355 the library file itself, and finally in
5356 @file{@code{data-directory}/images}.
5357
5358 Then this function returns a list of directories which contains first
5359 the directory in which @var{image} was found, followed by the value of
5360 @code{load-path}. If @var{path} is given, it is used instead of
5361 @code{load-path}.
5362
5363 If @var{no-error} is non-@code{nil} and a suitable path can't be
5364 found, don't signal an error. Instead, return a list of directories as
5365 before, except that @code{nil} appears in place of the image directory.
5366
5367 Here is an example of using @code{image-load-path-for-library}:
5368
5369 @example
5370 (defvar image-load-path) ; shush compiler
5371 (let* ((load-path (image-load-path-for-library
5372 "mh-e" "mh-logo.xpm"))
5373 (image-load-path (cons (car load-path)
5374 image-load-path)))
5375 (mh-tool-bar-folder-buttons-init))
5376 @end example
5377 @end defun
5378
5379 @node Showing Images
5380 @subsection Showing Images
5381 @cindex show image
5382
5383 You can use an image descriptor by setting up the @code{display}
5384 property yourself, but it is easier to use the functions in this
5385 section.
5386
5387 @defun insert-image image &optional string area slice
5388 This function inserts @var{image} in the current buffer at point. The
5389 value @var{image} should be an image descriptor; it could be a value
5390 returned by @code{create-image}, or the value of a symbol defined with
5391 @code{defimage}. The argument @var{string} specifies the text to put
5392 in the buffer to hold the image. If it is omitted or @code{nil},
5393 @code{insert-image} uses @code{" "} by default.
5394
5395 The argument @var{area} specifies whether to put the image in a margin.
5396 If it is @code{left-margin}, the image appears in the left margin;
5397 @code{right-margin} specifies the right margin. If @var{area} is
5398 @code{nil} or omitted, the image is displayed at point within the
5399 buffer's text.
5400
5401 The argument @var{slice} specifies a slice of the image to insert. If
5402 @var{slice} is @code{nil} or omitted the whole image is inserted.
5403 Otherwise, @var{slice} is a list @code{(@var{x} @var{y} @var{width}
5404 @var{height})} which specifies the @var{x} and @var{y} positions and
5405 @var{width} and @var{height} of the image area to insert. Integer
5406 values are in units of pixels. A floating-point number in the range
5407 0.0--1.0 stands for that fraction of the width or height of the entire
5408 image.
5409
5410 Internally, this function inserts @var{string} in the buffer, and gives
5411 it a @code{display} property which specifies @var{image}. @xref{Display
5412 Property}.
5413 @end defun
5414
5415 @cindex slice, image
5416 @cindex image slice
5417 @defun insert-sliced-image image &optional string area rows cols
5418 This function inserts @var{image} in the current buffer at point, like
5419 @code{insert-image}, but splits the image into @var{rows}x@var{cols}
5420 equally sized slices.
5421
5422 Emacs displays each slice as a
5423 separate image, and allows more intuitive scrolling up/down, instead of
5424 jumping up/down the entire image when paging through a buffer that
5425 displays (large) images.
5426 @end defun
5427
5428 @defun put-image image pos &optional string area
5429 This function puts image @var{image} in front of @var{pos} in the
5430 current buffer. The argument @var{pos} should be an integer or a
5431 marker. It specifies the buffer position where the image should appear.
5432 The argument @var{string} specifies the text that should hold the image
5433 as an alternative to the default.
5434
5435 The argument @var{image} must be an image descriptor, perhaps returned
5436 by @code{create-image} or stored by @code{defimage}.
5437
5438 The argument @var{area} specifies whether to put the image in a margin.
5439 If it is @code{left-margin}, the image appears in the left margin;
5440 @code{right-margin} specifies the right margin. If @var{area} is
5441 @code{nil} or omitted, the image is displayed at point within the
5442 buffer's text.
5443
5444 Internally, this function creates an overlay, and gives it a
5445 @code{before-string} property containing text that has a @code{display}
5446 property whose value is the image. (Whew!)
5447 @end defun
5448
5449 @defun remove-images start end &optional buffer
5450 This function removes images in @var{buffer} between positions
5451 @var{start} and @var{end}. If @var{buffer} is omitted or @code{nil},
5452 images are removed from the current buffer.
5453
5454 This removes only images that were put into @var{buffer} the way
5455 @code{put-image} does it, not images that were inserted with
5456 @code{insert-image} or in other ways.
5457 @end defun
5458
5459 @defun image-size spec &optional pixels frame
5460 @cindex size of image
5461 This function returns the size of an image as a pair
5462 @w{@code{(@var{width} . @var{height})}}. @var{spec} is an image
5463 specification. @var{pixels} non-@code{nil} means return sizes measured
5464 in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in the default character size
5465 of @var{frame} (@pxref{Frame Font}). @var{frame} is the frame on which
5466 the image will be displayed. @var{frame} null or omitted means use the
5467 selected frame (@pxref{Input Focus}).
5468 @end defun
5469
5470 @defvar max-image-size
5471 This variable is used to define the maximum size of image that Emacs
5472 will load. Emacs will refuse to load (and display) any image that is
5473 larger than this limit.
5474
5475 If the value is an integer, it directly specifies the maximum
5476 image height and width, measured in pixels. If it is floating
5477 point, it specifies the maximum image height and width
5478 as a ratio to the frame height and width. If the value is
5479 non-numeric, there is no explicit limit on the size of images.
5480
5481 The purpose of this variable is to prevent unreasonably large images
5482 from accidentally being loaded into Emacs. It only takes effect the
5483 first time an image is loaded. Once an image is placed in the image
5484 cache, it can always be displayed, even if the value of
5485 @code{max-image-size} is subsequently changed (@pxref{Image Cache}).
5486 @end defvar
5487
5488 @node Multi-Frame Images
5489 @subsection Multi-Frame Images
5490 @cindex multi-frame images
5491
5492 @cindex animation
5493 @cindex image animation
5494 @cindex image frames
5495 Some image files can contain more than one image. We say that there
5496 are multiple ``frames'' in the image. At present, Emacs supports
5497 multiple frames for GIF, TIFF, and certain ImageMagick formats such as
5498 DJVM@.
5499
5500 The frames can be used either to represent multiple pages (this is
5501 usually the case with multi-frame TIFF files, for example), or to
5502 create animation (usually the case with multi-frame GIF files).
5503
5504 A multi-frame image has a property @code{:index}, whose value is an
5505 integer (counting from 0) that specifies which frame is being displayed.
5506
5507 @defun image-multi-frame-p image
5508 This function returns non-@code{nil} if @var{image} contains more than
5509 one frame. The actual return value is a cons @code{(@var{nimages}
5510 . @var{delay})}, where @var{nimages} is the number of frames and
5511 @var{delay} is the delay in seconds between them, or @code{nil}
5512 if the image does not specify a delay. Images that are intended to be
5513 animated usually specify a frame delay, whereas ones that are intended
5514 to be treated as multiple pages do not.
5515 @end defun
5516
5517 @defun image-current-frame image
5518 This function returns the index of the current frame number for
5519 @var{image}, counting from 0.
5520 @end defun
5521
5522 @defun image-show-frame image n &optional nocheck
5523 This function switches @var{image} to frame number @var{n}. It
5524 replaces a frame number outside the valid range with that of the end
5525 of the range, unless @var{nocheck} is non-@code{nil}. If @var{image}
5526 does not contain a frame with the specified number, the image displays
5527 as a hollow box.
5528 @end defun
5529
5530 @defun image-animate image &optional index limit
5531 This function animates @var{image}. The optional integer @var{index}
5532 specifies the frame from which to start (default 0). The optional
5533 argument @var{limit} controls the length of the animation. If omitted
5534 or @code{nil}, the image animates once only; if @code{t} it loops
5535 forever; if a number animation stops after that many seconds.
5536 @end defun
5537
5538 @vindex image-minimum-frame-delay
5539 @vindex image-default-frame-delay
5540 @noindent Animation operates by means of a timer. Note that Emacs imposes a
5541 minimum frame delay of 0.01 (@code{image-minimum-frame-delay}) seconds.
5542 If the image itself does not specify a delay, Emacs uses
5543 @code{image-default-frame-delay}.
5544
5545 @defun image-animate-timer image
5546 This function returns the timer responsible for animating @var{image},
5547 if there is one.
5548 @end defun
5549
5550
5551 @node Image Cache
5552 @subsection Image Cache
5553 @cindex image cache
5554
5555 Emacs caches images so that it can display them again more
5556 efficiently. When Emacs displays an image, it searches the image
5557 cache for an existing image specification @code{equal} to the desired
5558 specification. If a match is found, the image is displayed from the
5559 cache. Otherwise, Emacs loads the image normally.
5560
5561 @defun image-flush spec &optional frame
5562 This function removes the image with specification @var{spec} from the
5563 image cache of frame @var{frame}. Image specifications are compared
5564 using @code{equal}. If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, it defaults to the
5565 selected frame. If @var{frame} is @code{t}, the image is flushed on
5566 all existing frames.
5567
5568 In Emacs's current implementation, each graphical terminal possesses an
5569 image cache, which is shared by all the frames on that terminal
5570 (@pxref{Multiple Terminals}). Thus, refreshing an image in one frame
5571 also refreshes it in all other frames on the same terminal.
5572 @end defun
5573
5574 One use for @code{image-flush} is to tell Emacs about a change in an
5575 image file. If an image specification contains a @code{:file}
5576 property, the image is cached based on the file's contents when the
5577 image is first displayed. Even if the file subsequently changes,
5578 Emacs continues displaying the old version of the image. Calling
5579 @code{image-flush} flushes the image from the cache, forcing Emacs to
5580 re-read the file the next time it needs to display that image.
5581
5582 Another use for @code{image-flush} is for memory conservation. If
5583 your Lisp program creates a large number of temporary images over a
5584 period much shorter than @code{image-cache-eviction-delay} (see
5585 below), you can opt to flush unused images yourself, instead of
5586 waiting for Emacs to do it automatically.
5587
5588 @defun clear-image-cache &optional filter
5589 This function clears an image cache, removing all the images stored in
5590 it. If @var{filter} is omitted or @code{nil}, it clears the cache for
5591 the selected frame. If @var{filter} is a frame, it clears the cache
5592 for that frame. If @var{filter} is @code{t}, all image caches are
5593 cleared. Otherwise, @var{filter} is taken to be a file name, and all
5594 images associated with that file name are removed from all image
5595 caches.
5596 @end defun
5597
5598 If an image in the image cache has not been displayed for a specified
5599 period of time, Emacs removes it from the cache and frees the
5600 associated memory.
5601
5602 @defvar image-cache-eviction-delay
5603 This variable specifies the number of seconds an image can remain in
5604 the cache without being displayed. When an image is not displayed for
5605 this length of time, Emacs removes it from the image cache.
5606
5607 Under some circumstances, if the number of images in the cache grows
5608 too large, the actual eviction delay may be shorter than this.
5609
5610 If the value is @code{nil}, Emacs does not remove images from the cache
5611 except when you explicitly clear it. This mode can be useful for
5612 debugging.
5613 @end defvar
5614
5615 @node Buttons
5616 @section Buttons
5617 @cindex buttons in buffers
5618 @cindex clickable buttons in buffers
5619
5620 The Button package defines functions for inserting and manipulating
5621 @dfn{buttons} that can be activated with the mouse or via keyboard
5622 commands. These buttons are typically used for various kinds of
5623 hyperlinks.
5624
5625 A button is essentially a set of text or overlay properties,
5626 attached to a stretch of text in a buffer. These properties are
5627 called @dfn{button properties}. One of these properties, the
5628 @dfn{action property}, specifies a function which is called when the
5629 user invokes the button using the keyboard or the mouse. The action
5630 function may examine the button and use its other properties as
5631 desired.
5632
5633 In some ways, the Button package duplicates the functionality in the
5634 Widget package. @xref{Top, , Introduction, widget, The Emacs Widget
5635 Library}. The advantage of the Button package is that it is faster,
5636 smaller, and simpler to program. From the point of view of the user,
5637 the interfaces produced by the two packages are very similar.
5638
5639 @menu
5640 * Button Properties:: Button properties with special meanings.
5641 * Button Types:: Defining common properties for classes of buttons.
5642 * Making Buttons:: Adding buttons to Emacs buffers.
5643 * Manipulating Buttons:: Getting and setting properties of buttons.
5644 * Button Buffer Commands:: Buffer-wide commands and bindings for buttons.
5645 @end menu
5646
5647 @node Button Properties
5648 @subsection Button Properties
5649 @cindex button properties
5650
5651 Each button has an associated list of properties defining its
5652 appearance and behavior, and other arbitrary properties may be used
5653 for application specific purposes. The following properties have
5654 special meaning to the Button package:
5655
5656 @table @code
5657 @item action
5658 @kindex action @r{(button property)}
5659 The function to call when the user invokes the button, which is passed
5660 the single argument @var{button}. By default this is @code{ignore},
5661 which does nothing.
5662
5663 @item mouse-action
5664 @kindex mouse-action @r{(button property)}
5665 This is similar to @code{action}, and when present, will be used
5666 instead of @code{action} for button invocations resulting from
5667 mouse-clicks (instead of the user hitting @key{RET}). If not
5668 present, mouse-clicks use @code{action} instead.
5669
5670 @item face
5671 @kindex face @r{(button property)}
5672 This is an Emacs face controlling how buttons of this type are
5673 displayed; by default this is the @code{button} face.
5674
5675 @item mouse-face
5676 @kindex mouse-face @r{(button property)}
5677 This is an additional face which controls appearance during
5678 mouse-overs (merged with the usual button face); by default this is
5679 the usual Emacs @code{highlight} face.
5680
5681 @item keymap
5682 @kindex keymap @r{(button property)}
5683 The button's keymap, defining bindings active within the button
5684 region. By default this is the usual button region keymap, stored
5685 in the variable @code{button-map}, which defines @key{RET} and
5686 @key{mouse-2} to invoke the button.
5687
5688 @item type
5689 @kindex type @r{(button property)}
5690 The button type. @xref{Button Types}.
5691
5692 @item help-echo
5693 @kindex help-index @r{(button property)}
5694 A string displayed by the Emacs tool-tip help system; by default,
5695 @code{"mouse-2, RET: Push this button"}.
5696
5697 @item follow-link
5698 @kindex follow-link @r{(button property)}
5699 The follow-link property, defining how a @key{Mouse-1} click behaves
5700 on this button, @xref{Clickable Text}.
5701
5702 @item button
5703 @kindex button @r{(button property)}
5704 All buttons have a non-@code{nil} @code{button} property, which may be useful
5705 in finding regions of text that comprise buttons (which is what the
5706 standard button functions do).
5707 @end table
5708
5709 There are other properties defined for the regions of text in a
5710 button, but these are not generally interesting for typical uses.
5711
5712 @node Button Types
5713 @subsection Button Types
5714 @cindex button types
5715
5716 Every button has a @dfn{button type}, which defines default values
5717 for the button's properties. Button types are arranged in a
5718 hierarchy, with specialized types inheriting from more general types,
5719 so that it's easy to define special-purpose types of buttons for
5720 specific tasks.
5721
5722 @defun define-button-type name &rest properties
5723 Define a button type called @var{name} (a symbol).
5724 The remaining arguments
5725 form a sequence of @var{property value} pairs, specifying default
5726 property values for buttons with this type (a button's type may be set
5727 by giving it a @code{type} property when creating the button, using
5728 the @code{:type} keyword argument).
5729
5730 In addition, the keyword argument @code{:supertype} may be used to
5731 specify a button-type from which @var{name} inherits its default
5732 property values. Note that this inheritance happens only when
5733 @var{name} is defined; subsequent changes to a supertype are not
5734 reflected in its subtypes.
5735 @end defun
5736
5737 Using @code{define-button-type} to define default properties for
5738 buttons is not necessary---buttons without any specified type use the
5739 built-in button-type @code{button}---but it is encouraged, since
5740 doing so usually makes the resulting code clearer and more efficient.
5741
5742 @node Making Buttons
5743 @subsection Making Buttons
5744 @cindex making buttons
5745
5746 Buttons are associated with a region of text, using an overlay or
5747 text properties to hold button-specific information, all of which are
5748 initialized from the button's type (which defaults to the built-in
5749 button type @code{button}). Like all Emacs text, the appearance of
5750 the button is governed by the @code{face} property; by default (via
5751 the @code{face} property inherited from the @code{button} button-type)
5752 this is a simple underline, like a typical web-page link.
5753
5754 For convenience, there are two sorts of button-creation functions,
5755 those that add button properties to an existing region of a buffer,
5756 called @code{make-...button}, and those that also insert the button
5757 text, called @code{insert-...button}.
5758
5759 The button-creation functions all take the @code{&rest} argument
5760 @var{properties}, which should be a sequence of @var{property value}
5761 pairs, specifying properties to add to the button; see @ref{Button
5762 Properties}. In addition, the keyword argument @code{:type} may be
5763 used to specify a button-type from which to inherit other properties;
5764 see @ref{Button Types}. Any properties not explicitly specified
5765 during creation will be inherited from the button's type (if the type
5766 defines such a property).
5767
5768 The following functions add a button using an overlay
5769 (@pxref{Overlays}) to hold the button properties:
5770
5771 @defun make-button beg end &rest properties
5772 This makes a button from @var{beg} to @var{end} in the
5773 current buffer, and returns it.
5774 @end defun
5775
5776 @defun insert-button label &rest properties
5777 This insert a button with the label @var{label} at point,
5778 and returns it.
5779 @end defun
5780
5781 The following functions are similar, but using text properties
5782 (@pxref{Text Properties}) to hold the button properties. Such buttons
5783 do not add markers to the buffer, so editing in the buffer does not
5784 slow down if there is an extremely large numbers of buttons. However,
5785 if there is an existing face text property on the text (e.g., a face
5786 assigned by Font Lock mode), the button face may not be visible. Both
5787 of these functions return the starting position of the new button.
5788
5789 @defun make-text-button beg end &rest properties
5790 This makes a button from @var{beg} to @var{end} in the current buffer,
5791 using text properties.
5792 @end defun
5793
5794 @defun insert-text-button label &rest properties
5795 This inserts a button with the label @var{label} at point, using text
5796 properties.
5797 @end defun
5798
5799 @node Manipulating Buttons
5800 @subsection Manipulating Buttons
5801 @cindex manipulating buttons
5802
5803 These are functions for getting and setting properties of buttons.
5804 Often these are used by a button's invocation function to determine
5805 what to do.
5806
5807 Where a @var{button} parameter is specified, it means an object
5808 referring to a specific button, either an overlay (for overlay
5809 buttons), or a buffer-position or marker (for text property buttons).
5810 Such an object is passed as the first argument to a button's
5811 invocation function when it is invoked.
5812
5813 @defun button-start button
5814 Return the position at which @var{button} starts.
5815 @end defun
5816
5817 @defun button-end button
5818 Return the position at which @var{button} ends.
5819 @end defun
5820
5821 @defun button-get button prop
5822 Get the property of button @var{button} named @var{prop}.
5823 @end defun
5824
5825 @defun button-put button prop val
5826 Set @var{button}'s @var{prop} property to @var{val}.
5827 @end defun
5828
5829 @defun button-activate button &optional use-mouse-action
5830 Call @var{button}'s @code{action} property (i.e., invoke the function
5831 that is the value of that property, passing it the single argument
5832 @var{button}). If @var{use-mouse-action} is non-@code{nil}, try to
5833 invoke the button's @code{mouse-action} property instead of
5834 @code{action}; if the button has no @code{mouse-action} property, use
5835 @code{action} as normal.
5836 @end defun
5837
5838 @defun button-label button
5839 Return @var{button}'s text label.
5840 @end defun
5841
5842 @defun button-type button
5843 Return @var{button}'s button-type.
5844 @end defun
5845
5846 @defun button-has-type-p button type
5847 Return @code{t} if @var{button} has button-type @var{type}, or one of
5848 @var{type}'s subtypes.
5849 @end defun
5850
5851 @defun button-at pos
5852 Return the button at position @var{pos} in the current buffer, or
5853 @code{nil}. If the button at @var{pos} is a text property button, the
5854 return value is a marker pointing to @var{pos}.
5855 @end defun
5856
5857 @defun button-type-put type prop val
5858 Set the button-type @var{type}'s @var{prop} property to @var{val}.
5859 @end defun
5860
5861 @defun button-type-get type prop
5862 Get the property of button-type @var{type} named @var{prop}.
5863 @end defun
5864
5865 @defun button-type-subtype-p type supertype
5866 Return @code{t} if button-type @var{type} is a subtype of @var{supertype}.
5867 @end defun
5868
5869 @node Button Buffer Commands
5870 @subsection Button Buffer Commands
5871 @cindex button buffer commands
5872
5873 These are commands and functions for locating and operating on
5874 buttons in an Emacs buffer.
5875
5876 @code{push-button} is the command that a user uses to actually push
5877 a button, and is bound by default in the button itself to @key{RET}
5878 and to @key{mouse-2} using a local keymap in the button's overlay or
5879 text properties. Commands that are useful outside the buttons itself,
5880 such as @code{forward-button} and @code{backward-button} are
5881 additionally available in the keymap stored in
5882 @code{button-buffer-map}; a mode which uses buttons may want to use
5883 @code{button-buffer-map} as a parent keymap for its keymap.
5884
5885 If the button has a non-@code{nil} @code{follow-link} property, and
5886 @code{mouse-1-click-follows-link} is set, a quick @key{Mouse-1} click
5887 will also activate the @code{push-button} command.
5888 @xref{Clickable Text}.
5889
5890 @deffn Command push-button &optional pos use-mouse-action
5891 Perform the action specified by a button at location @var{pos}.
5892 @var{pos} may be either a buffer position or a mouse-event. If
5893 @var{use-mouse-action} is non-@code{nil}, or @var{pos} is a
5894 mouse-event (@pxref{Mouse Events}), try to invoke the button's
5895 @code{mouse-action} property instead of @code{action}; if the button
5896 has no @code{mouse-action} property, use @code{action} as normal.
5897 @var{pos} defaults to point, except when @code{push-button} is invoked
5898 interactively as the result of a mouse-event, in which case, the mouse
5899 event's position is used. If there's no button at @var{pos}, do
5900 nothing and return @code{nil}, otherwise return @code{t}.
5901 @end deffn
5902
5903 @deffn Command forward-button n &optional wrap display-message
5904 Move to the @var{n}th next button, or @var{n}th previous button if
5905 @var{n} is negative. If @var{n} is zero, move to the start of any
5906 button at point. If @var{wrap} is non-@code{nil}, moving past either
5907 end of the buffer continues from the other end. If
5908 @var{display-message} is non-@code{nil}, the button's help-echo string
5909 is displayed. Any button with a non-@code{nil} @code{skip} property
5910 is skipped over. Returns the button found.
5911 @end deffn
5912
5913 @deffn Command backward-button n &optional wrap display-message
5914 Move to the @var{n}th previous button, or @var{n}th next button if
5915 @var{n} is negative. If @var{n} is zero, move to the start of any
5916 button at point. If @var{wrap} is non-@code{nil}, moving past either
5917 end of the buffer continues from the other end. If
5918 @var{display-message} is non-@code{nil}, the button's help-echo string
5919 is displayed. Any button with a non-@code{nil} @code{skip} property
5920 is skipped over. Returns the button found.
5921 @end deffn
5922
5923 @defun next-button pos &optional count-current
5924 @defunx previous-button pos &optional count-current
5925 Return the next button after (for @code{next-button}) or before (for
5926 @code{previous-button}) position @var{pos} in the current buffer. If
5927 @var{count-current} is non-@code{nil}, count any button at @var{pos}
5928 in the search, instead of starting at the next button.
5929 @end defun
5930
5931 @node Abstract Display
5932 @section Abstract Display
5933 @cindex ewoc
5934 @cindex display, abstract
5935 @cindex display, arbitrary objects
5936 @cindex model/view/controller
5937 @cindex view part, model/view/controller
5938
5939 The Ewoc package constructs buffer text that represents a structure
5940 of Lisp objects, and updates the text to follow changes in that
5941 structure. This is like the ``view'' component in the
5942 ``model--view--controller'' design paradigm. Ewoc means ``Emacs's
5943 Widget for Object Collections''.
5944
5945 An @dfn{ewoc} is a structure that organizes information required to
5946 construct buffer text that represents certain Lisp data. The buffer
5947 text of the ewoc has three parts, in order: first, fixed @dfn{header}
5948 text; next, textual descriptions of a series of data elements (Lisp
5949 objects that you specify); and last, fixed @dfn{footer} text.
5950 Specifically, an ewoc contains information on:
5951
5952 @itemize @bullet
5953 @item
5954 The buffer which its text is generated in.
5955
5956 @item
5957 The text's start position in the buffer.
5958
5959 @item
5960 The header and footer strings.
5961
5962 @item
5963 @cindex node, ewoc
5964 @c or "@cindex node, abstract display"?
5965 A doubly-linked chain of @dfn{nodes}, each of which contains:
5966
5967 @itemize
5968 @item
5969 A @dfn{data element}, a single Lisp object.
5970
5971 @item
5972 Links to the preceding and following nodes in the chain.
5973 @end itemize
5974
5975 @item
5976 A @dfn{pretty-printer} function which is responsible for
5977 inserting the textual representation of a data
5978 element value into the current buffer.
5979 @end itemize
5980
5981 Typically, you define an ewoc with @code{ewoc-create}, and then pass
5982 the resulting ewoc structure to other functions in the Ewoc package to
5983 build nodes within it, and display it in the buffer. Once it is
5984 displayed in the buffer, other functions determine the correspondence
5985 between buffer positions and nodes, move point from one node's textual
5986 representation to another, and so forth. @xref{Abstract Display
5987 Functions}.
5988
5989 @cindex encapsulation, ewoc
5990 @c or "@cindex encapsulation, abstract display"?
5991 A node @dfn{encapsulates} a data element much the way a variable
5992 holds a value. Normally, encapsulation occurs as a part of adding a
5993 node to the ewoc. You can retrieve the data element value and place a
5994 new value in its place, like so:
5995
5996 @lisp
5997 (ewoc-data @var{node})
5998 @result{} value
5999
6000 (ewoc-set-data @var{node} @var{new-value})
6001 @result{} @var{new-value}
6002 @end lisp
6003
6004 @noindent
6005 You can also use, as the data element value, a Lisp object (list or
6006 vector) that is a container for the real value, or an index into
6007 some other structure. The example (@pxref{Abstract Display Example})
6008 uses the latter approach.
6009
6010 When the data changes, you will want to update the text in the
6011 buffer. You can update all nodes by calling @code{ewoc-refresh}, or
6012 just specific nodes using @code{ewoc-invalidate}, or all nodes
6013 satisfying a predicate using @code{ewoc-map}. Alternatively, you can
6014 delete invalid nodes using @code{ewoc-delete} or @code{ewoc-filter},
6015 and add new nodes in their place. Deleting a node from an ewoc deletes
6016 its associated textual description from buffer, as well.
6017
6018 @menu
6019 * Abstract Display Functions:: Functions in the Ewoc package.
6020 * Abstract Display Example:: Example of using Ewoc.
6021 @end menu
6022
6023 @node Abstract Display Functions
6024 @subsection Abstract Display Functions
6025
6026 In this subsection, @var{ewoc} and @var{node} stand for the
6027 structures described above (@pxref{Abstract Display}), while
6028 @var{data} stands for an arbitrary Lisp object used as a data element.
6029
6030 @defun ewoc-create pretty-printer &optional header footer nosep
6031 This constructs and returns a new ewoc, with no nodes (and thus no data
6032 elements). @var{pretty-printer} should be a function that takes one
6033 argument, a data element of the sort you plan to use in this ewoc, and
6034 inserts its textual description at point using @code{insert} (and never
6035 @code{insert-before-markers}, because that would interfere with the
6036 Ewoc package's internal mechanisms).
6037
6038 Normally, a newline is automatically inserted after the header,
6039 the footer and every node's textual description. If @var{nosep}
6040 is non-@code{nil}, no newline is inserted. This may be useful for
6041 displaying an entire ewoc on a single line, for example, or for
6042 making nodes invisible by arranging for @var{pretty-printer}
6043 to do nothing for those nodes.
6044
6045 An ewoc maintains its text in the buffer that is current when
6046 you create it, so switch to the intended buffer before calling
6047 @code{ewoc-create}.
6048 @end defun
6049
6050 @defun ewoc-buffer ewoc
6051 This returns the buffer where @var{ewoc} maintains its text.
6052 @end defun
6053
6054 @defun ewoc-get-hf ewoc
6055 This returns a cons cell @code{(@var{header} . @var{footer})}
6056 made from @var{ewoc}'s header and footer.
6057 @end defun
6058
6059 @defun ewoc-set-hf ewoc header footer
6060 This sets the header and footer of @var{ewoc} to the strings
6061 @var{header} and @var{footer}, respectively.
6062 @end defun
6063
6064 @defun ewoc-enter-first ewoc data
6065 @defunx ewoc-enter-last ewoc data
6066 These add a new node encapsulating @var{data}, putting it, respectively,
6067 at the beginning or end of @var{ewoc}'s chain of nodes.
6068 @end defun
6069
6070 @defun ewoc-enter-before ewoc node data
6071 @defunx ewoc-enter-after ewoc node data
6072 These add a new node encapsulating @var{data}, adding it to
6073 @var{ewoc} before or after @var{node}, respectively.
6074 @end defun
6075
6076 @defun ewoc-prev ewoc node
6077 @defunx ewoc-next ewoc node
6078 These return, respectively, the previous node and the next node of @var{node}
6079 in @var{ewoc}.
6080 @end defun
6081
6082 @defun ewoc-nth ewoc n
6083 This returns the node in @var{ewoc} found at zero-based index @var{n}.
6084 A negative @var{n} means count from the end. @code{ewoc-nth} returns
6085 @code{nil} if @var{n} is out of range.
6086 @end defun
6087
6088 @defun ewoc-data node
6089 This extracts the data encapsulated by @var{node} and returns it.
6090 @end defun
6091
6092 @defun ewoc-set-data node data
6093 This sets the data encapsulated by @var{node} to @var{data}.
6094 @end defun
6095
6096 @defun ewoc-locate ewoc &optional pos guess
6097 This determines the node in @var{ewoc} which contains point (or
6098 @var{pos} if specified), and returns that node. If @var{ewoc} has no
6099 nodes, it returns @code{nil}. If @var{pos} is before the first node,
6100 it returns the first node; if @var{pos} is after the last node, it returns
6101 the last node. The optional third arg @var{guess}
6102 should be a node that is likely to be near @var{pos}; this doesn't
6103 alter the result, but makes the function run faster.
6104 @end defun
6105
6106 @defun ewoc-location node
6107 This returns the start position of @var{node}.
6108 @end defun
6109
6110 @defun ewoc-goto-prev ewoc arg
6111 @defunx ewoc-goto-next ewoc arg
6112 These move point to the previous or next, respectively, @var{arg}th node
6113 in @var{ewoc}. @code{ewoc-goto-prev} does not move if it is already at
6114 the first node or if @var{ewoc} is empty, whereas @code{ewoc-goto-next}
6115 moves past the last node, returning @code{nil}. Excepting this special
6116 case, these functions return the node moved to.
6117 @end defun
6118
6119 @defun ewoc-goto-node ewoc node
6120 This moves point to the start of @var{node} in @var{ewoc}.
6121 @end defun
6122
6123 @defun ewoc-refresh ewoc
6124 This function regenerates the text of @var{ewoc}. It works by
6125 deleting the text between the header and the footer, i.e., all the
6126 data elements' representations, and then calling the pretty-printer
6127 function for each node, one by one, in order.
6128 @end defun
6129
6130 @defun ewoc-invalidate ewoc &rest nodes
6131 This is similar to @code{ewoc-refresh}, except that only @var{nodes} in
6132 @var{ewoc} are updated instead of the entire set.
6133 @end defun
6134
6135 @defun ewoc-delete ewoc &rest nodes
6136 This deletes each node in @var{nodes} from @var{ewoc}.
6137 @end defun
6138
6139 @defun ewoc-filter ewoc predicate &rest args
6140 This calls @var{predicate} for each data element in @var{ewoc} and
6141 deletes those nodes for which @var{predicate} returns @code{nil}.
6142 Any @var{args} are passed to @var{predicate}.
6143 @end defun
6144
6145 @defun ewoc-collect ewoc predicate &rest args
6146 This calls @var{predicate} for each data element in @var{ewoc}
6147 and returns a list of those elements for which @var{predicate}
6148 returns non-@code{nil}. The elements in the list are ordered
6149 as in the buffer. Any @var{args} are passed to @var{predicate}.
6150 @end defun
6151
6152 @defun ewoc-map map-function ewoc &rest args
6153 This calls @var{map-function} for each data element in @var{ewoc} and
6154 updates those nodes for which @var{map-function} returns non-@code{nil}.
6155 Any @var{args} are passed to @var{map-function}.
6156 @end defun
6157
6158 @node Abstract Display Example
6159 @subsection Abstract Display Example
6160
6161 Here is a simple example using functions of the ewoc package to
6162 implement a @dfn{color components} display, an area in a buffer that
6163 represents a vector of three integers (itself representing a 24-bit RGB
6164 value) in various ways.
6165
6166 @example
6167 (setq colorcomp-ewoc nil
6168 colorcomp-data nil
6169 colorcomp-mode-map nil
6170 colorcomp-labels ["Red" "Green" "Blue"])
6171
6172 (defun colorcomp-pp (data)
6173 (if data
6174 (let ((comp (aref colorcomp-data data)))
6175 (insert (aref colorcomp-labels data) "\t: #x"
6176 (format "%02X" comp) " "
6177 (make-string (ash comp -2) ?#) "\n"))
6178 (let ((cstr (format "#%02X%02X%02X"
6179 (aref colorcomp-data 0)
6180 (aref colorcomp-data 1)
6181 (aref colorcomp-data 2)))
6182 (samp " (sample text) "))
6183 (insert "Color\t: "
6184 (propertize samp 'face
6185 `(foreground-color . ,cstr))
6186 (propertize samp 'face
6187 `(background-color . ,cstr))
6188 "\n"))))
6189
6190 (defun colorcomp (color)
6191 "Allow fiddling with COLOR in a new buffer.
6192 The buffer is in Color Components mode."
6193 (interactive "sColor (name or #RGB or #RRGGBB): ")
6194 (when (string= "" color)
6195 (setq color "green"))
6196 (unless (color-values color)
6197 (error "No such color: %S" color))
6198 (switch-to-buffer
6199 (generate-new-buffer (format "originally: %s" color)))
6200 (kill-all-local-variables)
6201 (setq major-mode 'colorcomp-mode
6202 mode-name "Color Components")
6203 (use-local-map colorcomp-mode-map)
6204 (erase-buffer)
6205 (buffer-disable-undo)
6206 (let ((data (apply 'vector (mapcar (lambda (n) (ash n -8))
6207 (color-values color))))
6208 (ewoc (ewoc-create 'colorcomp-pp
6209 "\nColor Components\n\n"
6210 (substitute-command-keys
6211 "\n\\@{colorcomp-mode-map@}"))))
6212 (set (make-local-variable 'colorcomp-data) data)
6213 (set (make-local-variable 'colorcomp-ewoc) ewoc)
6214 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 0)
6215 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 1)
6216 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 2)
6217 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc nil)))
6218 @end example
6219
6220 @cindex controller part, model/view/controller
6221 This example can be extended to be a color selection widget (in
6222 other words, the ``controller'' part of the ``model--view--controller''
6223 design paradigm) by defining commands to modify @code{colorcomp-data}
6224 and to finish the selection process, and a keymap to tie it all
6225 together conveniently.
6226
6227 @smallexample
6228 (defun colorcomp-mod (index limit delta)
6229 (let ((cur (aref colorcomp-data index)))
6230 (unless (= limit cur)
6231 (aset colorcomp-data index (+ cur delta)))
6232 (ewoc-invalidate
6233 colorcomp-ewoc
6234 (ewoc-nth colorcomp-ewoc index)
6235 (ewoc-nth colorcomp-ewoc -1))))
6236
6237 (defun colorcomp-R-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 0 255 1))
6238 (defun colorcomp-G-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 1 255 1))
6239 (defun colorcomp-B-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 2 255 1))
6240 (defun colorcomp-R-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 0 0 -1))
6241 (defun colorcomp-G-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 1 0 -1))
6242 (defun colorcomp-B-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 2 0 -1))
6243
6244 (defun colorcomp-copy-as-kill-and-exit ()
6245 "Copy the color components into the kill ring and kill the buffer.
6246 The string is formatted #RRGGBB (hash followed by six hex digits)."
6247 (interactive)
6248 (kill-new (format "#%02X%02X%02X"
6249 (aref colorcomp-data 0)
6250 (aref colorcomp-data 1)
6251 (aref colorcomp-data 2)))
6252 (kill-buffer nil))
6253
6254 (setq colorcomp-mode-map
6255 (let ((m (make-sparse-keymap)))
6256 (suppress-keymap m)
6257 (define-key m "i" 'colorcomp-R-less)
6258 (define-key m "o" 'colorcomp-R-more)
6259 (define-key m "k" 'colorcomp-G-less)
6260 (define-key m "l" 'colorcomp-G-more)
6261 (define-key m "," 'colorcomp-B-less)
6262 (define-key m "." 'colorcomp-B-more)
6263 (define-key m " " 'colorcomp-copy-as-kill-and-exit)
6264 m))
6265 @end smallexample
6266
6267 Note that we never modify the data in each node, which is fixed when the
6268 ewoc is created to be either @code{nil} or an index into the vector
6269 @code{colorcomp-data}, the actual color components.
6270
6271 @node Blinking
6272 @section Blinking Parentheses
6273 @cindex parenthesis matching
6274 @cindex blinking parentheses
6275 @cindex balancing parentheses
6276
6277 This section describes the mechanism by which Emacs shows a matching
6278 open parenthesis when the user inserts a close parenthesis.
6279
6280 @defvar blink-paren-function
6281 The value of this variable should be a function (of no arguments) to
6282 be called whenever a character with close parenthesis syntax is inserted.
6283 The value of @code{blink-paren-function} may be @code{nil}, in which
6284 case nothing is done.
6285 @end defvar
6286
6287 @defopt blink-matching-paren
6288 If this variable is @code{nil}, then @code{blink-matching-open} does
6289 nothing.
6290 @end defopt
6291
6292 @defopt blink-matching-paren-distance
6293 This variable specifies the maximum distance to scan for a matching
6294 parenthesis before giving up.
6295 @end defopt
6296
6297 @defopt blink-matching-delay
6298 This variable specifies the number of seconds to keep indicating the
6299 matching parenthesis. A fraction of a second often gives good
6300 results, but the default is 1, which works on all systems.
6301 @end defopt
6302
6303 @deffn Command blink-matching-open
6304 This function is the default value of @code{blink-paren-function}. It
6305 assumes that point follows a character with close parenthesis syntax
6306 and applies the appropriate effect momentarily to the matching opening
6307 character. If that character is not already on the screen, it
6308 displays the character's context in the echo area. To avoid long
6309 delays, this function does not search farther than
6310 @code{blink-matching-paren-distance} characters.
6311
6312 Here is an example of calling this function explicitly.
6313
6314 @smallexample
6315 @group
6316 (defun interactive-blink-matching-open ()
6317 "Indicate momentarily the start of parenthesized sexp before point."
6318 (interactive)
6319 @end group
6320 @group
6321 (let ((blink-matching-paren-distance
6322 (buffer-size))
6323 (blink-matching-paren t))
6324 (blink-matching-open)))
6325 @end group
6326 @end smallexample
6327 @end deffn
6328
6329 @node Character Display
6330 @section Character Display
6331
6332 This section describes how characters are actually displayed by
6333 Emacs. Typically, a character is displayed as a @dfn{glyph} (a
6334 graphical symbol which occupies one character position on the screen),
6335 whose appearance corresponds to the character itself. For example,
6336 the character @samp{a} (character code 97) is displayed as @samp{a}.
6337 Some characters, however, are displayed specially. For example, the
6338 formfeed character (character code 12) is usually displayed as a
6339 sequence of two glyphs, @samp{^L}, while the newline character
6340 (character code 10) starts a new screen line.
6341
6342 You can modify how each character is displayed by defining a
6343 @dfn{display table}, which maps each character code into a sequence of
6344 glyphs. @xref{Display Tables}.
6345
6346 @menu
6347 * Usual Display:: The usual conventions for displaying characters.
6348 * Display Tables:: What a display table consists of.
6349 * Active Display Table:: How Emacs selects a display table to use.
6350 * Glyphs:: How to define a glyph, and what glyphs mean.
6351 * Glyphless Chars:: How glyphless characters are drawn.
6352 @end menu
6353
6354 @node Usual Display
6355 @subsection Usual Display Conventions
6356
6357 Here are the conventions for displaying each character code (in the
6358 absence of a display table, which can override these
6359 @iftex
6360 conventions).
6361 @end iftex
6362 @ifnottex
6363 conventions; @pxref{Display Tables}).
6364 @end ifnottex
6365
6366 @cindex printable ASCII characters
6367 @itemize @bullet
6368 @item
6369 The @dfn{printable @acronym{ASCII} characters}, character codes 32
6370 through 126 (consisting of numerals, English letters, and symbols like
6371 @samp{#}) are displayed literally.
6372
6373 @item
6374 The tab character (character code 9) displays as whitespace stretching
6375 up to the next tab stop column. @xref{Text Display,,, emacs, The GNU
6376 Emacs Manual}. The variable @code{tab-width} controls the number of
6377 spaces per tab stop (see below).
6378
6379 @item
6380 The newline character (character code 10) has a special effect: it
6381 ends the preceding line and starts a new line.
6382
6383 @cindex ASCII control characters
6384 @item
6385 The non-printable @dfn{@acronym{ASCII} control characters}---character
6386 codes 0 through 31, as well as the @key{DEL} character (character code
6387 127)---display in one of two ways according to the variable
6388 @code{ctl-arrow}. If this variable is non-@code{nil} (the default),
6389 these characters are displayed as sequences of two glyphs, where the
6390 first glyph is @samp{^} (a display table can specify a glyph to use
6391 instead of @samp{^}); e.g., the @key{DEL} character is displayed as
6392 @samp{^?}.
6393
6394 If @code{ctl-arrow} is @code{nil}, these characters are displayed as
6395 octal escapes (see below).
6396
6397 This rule also applies to carriage return (character code 13), if that
6398 character appears in the buffer. But carriage returns usually do not
6399 appear in buffer text; they are eliminated as part of end-of-line
6400 conversion (@pxref{Coding System Basics}).
6401
6402 @cindex octal escapes
6403 @item
6404 @dfn{Raw bytes} are non-@acronym{ASCII} characters with codes 128
6405 through 255 (@pxref{Text Representations}). These characters display
6406 as @dfn{octal escapes}: sequences of four glyphs, where the first
6407 glyph is the @acronym{ASCII} code for @samp{\}, and the others are
6408 digit characters representing the character code in octal. (A display
6409 table can specify a glyph to use instead of @samp{\}.)
6410
6411 @item
6412 Each non-@acronym{ASCII} character with code above 255 is displayed
6413 literally, if the terminal supports it. If the terminal does not
6414 support it, the character is said to be @dfn{glyphless}, and it is
6415 usually displayed using a placeholder glyph. For example, if a
6416 graphical terminal has no font for a character, Emacs usually displays
6417 a box containing the character code in hexadecimal. @xref{Glyphless
6418 Chars}.
6419 @end itemize
6420
6421 The above display conventions apply even when there is a display
6422 table, for any character whose entry in the active display table is
6423 @code{nil}. Thus, when you set up a display table, you need only
6424 specify the characters for which you want special behavior.
6425
6426 The following variables affect how certain characters are displayed
6427 on the screen. Since they change the number of columns the characters
6428 occupy, they also affect the indentation functions. They also affect
6429 how the mode line is displayed; if you want to force redisplay of the
6430 mode line using the new values, call the function
6431 @code{force-mode-line-update} (@pxref{Mode Line Format}).
6432
6433 @defopt ctl-arrow
6434 @cindex control characters in display
6435 This buffer-local variable controls how control characters are
6436 displayed. If it is non-@code{nil}, they are displayed as a caret
6437 followed by the character: @samp{^A}. If it is @code{nil}, they are
6438 displayed as octal escapes: a backslash followed by three octal
6439 digits, as in @samp{\001}.
6440 @end defopt
6441
6442 @defopt tab-width
6443 The value of this buffer-local variable is the spacing between tab
6444 stops used for displaying tab characters in Emacs buffers. The value
6445 is in units of columns, and the default is 8. Note that this feature
6446 is completely independent of the user-settable tab stops used by the
6447 command @code{tab-to-tab-stop}. @xref{Indent Tabs}.
6448 @end defopt
6449
6450 @node Display Tables
6451 @subsection Display Tables
6452
6453 @cindex display table
6454 A display table is a special-purpose char-table
6455 (@pxref{Char-Tables}), with @code{display-table} as its subtype, which
6456 is used to override the usual character display conventions. This
6457 section describes how to make, inspect, and assign elements to a
6458 display table object.
6459
6460 @defun make-display-table
6461 This creates and returns a display table. The table initially has
6462 @code{nil} in all elements.
6463 @end defun
6464
6465 The ordinary elements of the display table are indexed by character
6466 codes; the element at index @var{c} says how to display the character
6467 code @var{c}. The value should be @code{nil} (which means to display
6468 the character @var{c} according to the usual display conventions;
6469 @pxref{Usual Display}), or a vector of glyph codes (which means to
6470 display the character @var{c} as those glyphs; @pxref{Glyphs}).
6471
6472 @strong{Warning:} if you use the display table to change the display
6473 of newline characters, the whole buffer will be displayed as one long
6474 line.
6475
6476 The display table also has six @dfn{extra slots} which serve special
6477 purposes. Here is a table of their meanings; @code{nil} in any slot
6478 means to use the default for that slot, as stated below.
6479
6480 @table @asis
6481 @item 0
6482 The glyph for the end of a truncated screen line (the default for this
6483 is @samp{$}). @xref{Glyphs}. On graphical terminals, Emacs uses
6484 arrows in the fringes to indicate truncation, so the display table has
6485 no effect.
6486
6487 @item 1
6488 The glyph for the end of a continued line (the default is @samp{\}).
6489 On graphical terminals, Emacs uses curved arrows in the fringes to
6490 indicate continuation, so the display table has no effect.
6491
6492 @item 2
6493 The glyph for indicating a character displayed as an octal character
6494 code (the default is @samp{\}).
6495
6496 @item 3
6497 The glyph for indicating a control character (the default is @samp{^}).
6498
6499 @item 4
6500 A vector of glyphs for indicating the presence of invisible lines (the
6501 default is @samp{...}). @xref{Selective Display}.
6502
6503 @item 5
6504 The glyph used to draw the border between side-by-side windows (the
6505 default is @samp{|}). @xref{Splitting Windows}. This takes effect only
6506 when there are no scroll bars; if scroll bars are supported and in use,
6507 a scroll bar separates the two windows.
6508 @end table
6509
6510 For example, here is how to construct a display table that mimics
6511 the effect of setting @code{ctl-arrow} to a non-@code{nil} value
6512 (@pxref{Glyphs}, for the function @code{make-glyph-code}):
6513
6514 @example
6515 (setq disptab (make-display-table))
6516 (dotimes (i 32)
6517 (or (= i ?\t)
6518 (= i ?\n)
6519 (aset disptab i
6520 (vector (make-glyph-code ?^ 'escape-glyph)
6521 (make-glyph-code (+ i 64) 'escape-glyph)))))
6522 (aset disptab 127
6523 (vector (make-glyph-code ?^ 'escape-glyph)
6524 (make-glyph-code ?? 'escape-glyph)))))
6525 @end example
6526
6527 @defun display-table-slot display-table slot
6528 This function returns the value of the extra slot @var{slot} of
6529 @var{display-table}. The argument @var{slot} may be a number from 0 to
6530 5 inclusive, or a slot name (symbol). Valid symbols are
6531 @code{truncation}, @code{wrap}, @code{escape}, @code{control},
6532 @code{selective-display}, and @code{vertical-border}.
6533 @end defun
6534
6535 @defun set-display-table-slot display-table slot value
6536 This function stores @var{value} in the extra slot @var{slot} of
6537 @var{display-table}. The argument @var{slot} may be a number from 0 to
6538 5 inclusive, or a slot name (symbol). Valid symbols are
6539 @code{truncation}, @code{wrap}, @code{escape}, @code{control},
6540 @code{selective-display}, and @code{vertical-border}.
6541 @end defun
6542
6543 @defun describe-display-table display-table
6544 This function displays a description of the display table
6545 @var{display-table} in a help buffer.
6546 @end defun
6547
6548 @deffn Command describe-current-display-table
6549 This command displays a description of the current display table in a
6550 help buffer.
6551 @end deffn
6552
6553 @node Active Display Table
6554 @subsection Active Display Table
6555 @cindex active display table
6556
6557 Each window can specify a display table, and so can each buffer.
6558 The window's display table, if there is one, takes precedence over the
6559 buffer's display table. If neither exists, Emacs tries to use the
6560 standard display table; if that is @code{nil}, Emacs uses the usual
6561 character display conventions (@pxref{Usual Display}).
6562
6563 Note that display tables affect how the mode line is displayed, so
6564 if you want to force redisplay of the mode line using a new display
6565 table, call @code{force-mode-line-update} (@pxref{Mode Line Format}).
6566
6567 @defun window-display-table &optional window
6568 This function returns @var{window}'s display table, or @code{nil} if
6569 there is none. The default for @var{window} is the selected window.
6570 @end defun
6571
6572 @defun set-window-display-table window table
6573 This function sets the display table of @var{window} to @var{table}.
6574 The argument @var{table} should be either a display table or
6575 @code{nil}.
6576 @end defun
6577
6578 @defvar buffer-display-table
6579 This variable is automatically buffer-local in all buffers; its value
6580 specifies the buffer's display table. If it is @code{nil}, there is
6581 no buffer display table.
6582 @end defvar
6583
6584 @defvar standard-display-table
6585 The value of this variable is the standard display table, which is
6586 used when Emacs is displaying a buffer in a window with neither a
6587 window display table nor a buffer display table defined, or when Emacs
6588 is outputting text to the standard output or error streams. Although its
6589 default is typically @code{nil}, in an interactive session if the
6590 terminal cannot display curved quotes, its default maps curved quotes
6591 to ASCII approximations. @xref{Keys in Documentation}.
6592 @end defvar
6593
6594 The @file{disp-table} library defines several functions for changing
6595 the standard display table.
6596
6597 @node Glyphs
6598 @subsection Glyphs
6599 @cindex glyph
6600
6601 @cindex glyph code
6602 A @dfn{glyph} is a graphical symbol which occupies a single
6603 character position on the screen. Each glyph is represented in Lisp
6604 as a @dfn{glyph code}, which specifies a character and optionally a
6605 face to display it in (@pxref{Faces}). The main use of glyph codes is
6606 as the entries of display tables (@pxref{Display Tables}). The
6607 following functions are used to manipulate glyph codes:
6608
6609 @defun make-glyph-code char &optional face
6610 This function returns a glyph code representing char @var{char} with
6611 face @var{face}. If @var{face} is omitted or @code{nil}, the glyph
6612 uses the default face; in that case, the glyph code is an integer. If
6613 @var{face} is non-@code{nil}, the glyph code is not necessarily an
6614 integer object.
6615 @end defun
6616
6617 @defun glyph-char glyph
6618 This function returns the character of glyph code @var{glyph}.
6619 @end defun
6620
6621 @defun glyph-face glyph
6622 This function returns face of glyph code @var{glyph}, or @code{nil} if
6623 @var{glyph} uses the default face.
6624 @end defun
6625
6626 @ifnottex
6627 You can set up a @dfn{glyph table} to change how glyph codes are
6628 actually displayed on text terminals. This feature is semi-obsolete;
6629 use @code{glyphless-char-display} instead (@pxref{Glyphless Chars}).
6630
6631 @defvar glyph-table
6632 The value of this variable, if non-@code{nil}, is the current glyph
6633 table. It takes effect only on character terminals; on graphical
6634 displays, all glyphs are displayed literally. The glyph table should
6635 be a vector whose @var{g}th element specifies how to display glyph
6636 code @var{g}, where @var{g} is the glyph code for a glyph whose face
6637 is unspecified. Each element should be one of the following:
6638
6639 @table @asis
6640 @item @code{nil}
6641 Display this glyph literally.
6642
6643 @item a string
6644 Display this glyph by sending the specified string to the terminal.
6645
6646 @item a glyph code
6647 Display the specified glyph code instead.
6648 @end table
6649
6650 Any integer glyph code greater than or equal to the length of the
6651 glyph table is displayed literally.
6652 @end defvar
6653 @end ifnottex
6654
6655 @node Glyphless Chars
6656 @subsection Glyphless Character Display
6657 @cindex glyphless characters
6658
6659 @dfn{Glyphless characters} are characters which are displayed in a
6660 special way, e.g., as a box containing a hexadecimal code, instead of
6661 being displayed literally. These include characters which are
6662 explicitly defined to be glyphless, as well as characters for which
6663 there is no available font (on a graphical display), and characters
6664 which cannot be encoded by the terminal's coding system (on a text
6665 terminal).
6666
6667 @defvar glyphless-char-display
6668 The value of this variable is a char-table which defines glyphless
6669 characters and how they are displayed. Each entry must be one of the
6670 following display methods:
6671
6672 @table @asis
6673 @item @code{nil}
6674 Display the character in the usual way.
6675
6676 @item @code{zero-width}
6677 Don't display the character.
6678
6679 @item @code{thin-space}
6680 Display a thin space, 1-pixel wide on graphical displays, or
6681 1-character wide on text terminals.
6682
6683 @item @code{empty-box}
6684 Display an empty box.
6685
6686 @item @code{hex-code}
6687 Display a box containing the Unicode codepoint of the character, in
6688 hexadecimal notation.
6689
6690 @item an @acronym{ASCII} string
6691 Display a box containing that string. The string should contain at
6692 most 6 @acronym{ASCII} characters.
6693
6694 @item a cons cell @code{(@var{graphical} . @var{text})}
6695 Display with @var{graphical} on graphical displays, and with
6696 @var{text} on text terminals. Both @var{graphical} and @var{text}
6697 must be one of the display methods described above.
6698 @end table
6699
6700 @noindent
6701 The @code{thin-space}, @code{empty-box}, @code{hex-code}, and
6702 @acronym{ASCII} string display methods are drawn with the
6703 @code{glyphless-char} face. On text terminals, a box is emulated by
6704 square brackets, @samp{[]}.
6705
6706 The char-table has one extra slot, which determines how to display any
6707 character that cannot be displayed with any available font, or cannot
6708 be encoded by the terminal's coding system. Its value should be one
6709 of the above display methods, except @code{zero-width} or a cons cell.
6710
6711 If a character has a non-@code{nil} entry in an active display table,
6712 the display table takes effect; in this case, Emacs does not consult
6713 @code{glyphless-char-display} at all.
6714 @end defvar
6715
6716 @defopt glyphless-char-display-control
6717 This user option provides a convenient way to set
6718 @code{glyphless-char-display} for groups of similar characters. Do
6719 not set its value directly from Lisp code; the value takes effect only
6720 via a custom @code{:set} function (@pxref{Variable Definitions}),
6721 which updates @code{glyphless-char-display}.
6722
6723 Its value should be an alist of elements @code{(@var{group}
6724 . @var{method})}, where @var{group} is a symbol specifying a group of
6725 characters, and @var{method} is a symbol specifying how to display
6726 them.
6727
6728 @var{group} should be one of the following:
6729
6730 @table @code
6731 @item c0-control
6732 @acronym{ASCII} control characters @code{U+0000} to @code{U+001F},
6733 excluding the newline and tab characters (normally displayed as escape
6734 sequences like @samp{^A}; @pxref{Text Display,, How Text Is Displayed,
6735 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
6736
6737 @item c1-control
6738 Non-@acronym{ASCII}, non-printing characters @code{U+0080} to
6739 @code{U+009F} (normally displayed as octal escape sequences like
6740 @samp{\230}).
6741
6742 @item format-control
6743 Characters of Unicode General Category [Cf], such as @samp{U+200E}
6744 (Left-to-Right Mark), but excluding characters that have graphic
6745 images, such as @samp{U+00AD} (Soft Hyphen).
6746
6747 @item no-font
6748 Characters for there is no suitable font, or which cannot be encoded
6749 by the terminal's coding system.
6750 @end table
6751
6752 @c FIXME: this can also be 'acronym', but that's not currently
6753 @c completely implemented; it applies only to the format-control
6754 @c group, and only works if the acronym is in 'char-acronym-table'.
6755 The @var{method} symbol should be one of @code{zero-width},
6756 @code{thin-space}, @code{empty-box}, or @code{hex-code}. These have
6757 the same meanings as in @code{glyphless-char-display}, above.
6758 @end defopt
6759
6760 @node Beeping
6761 @section Beeping
6762 @cindex bell
6763
6764 This section describes how to make Emacs ring the bell (or blink the
6765 screen) to attract the user's attention. Be conservative about how
6766 often you do this; frequent bells can become irritating. Also be
6767 careful not to use just beeping when signaling an error is more
6768 appropriate (@pxref{Errors}).
6769
6770 @defun ding &optional do-not-terminate
6771 @cindex keyboard macro termination
6772 This function beeps, or flashes the screen (see @code{visible-bell} below).
6773 It also terminates any keyboard macro currently executing unless
6774 @var{do-not-terminate} is non-@code{nil}.
6775 @end defun
6776
6777 @defun beep &optional do-not-terminate
6778 This is a synonym for @code{ding}.
6779 @end defun
6780
6781 @defopt visible-bell
6782 This variable determines whether Emacs should flash the screen to
6783 represent a bell. Non-@code{nil} means yes, @code{nil} means no.
6784 This is effective on graphical displays, and on text terminals
6785 provided the terminal's Termcap entry defines the visible bell
6786 capability (@samp{vb}).
6787 @end defopt
6788
6789 @defvar ring-bell-function
6790 If this is non-@code{nil}, it specifies how Emacs should ring the
6791 bell. Its value should be a function of no arguments. If this is
6792 non-@code{nil}, it takes precedence over the @code{visible-bell}
6793 variable.
6794 @end defvar
6795
6796 @node Window Systems
6797 @section Window Systems
6798
6799 Emacs works with several window systems, most notably the X Window
6800 System. Both Emacs and X use the term ``window'', but use it
6801 differently. An Emacs frame is a single window as far as X is
6802 concerned; the individual Emacs windows are not known to X at all.
6803
6804 @defvar window-system
6805 This terminal-local variable tells Lisp programs what window system
6806 Emacs is using for displaying the frame. The possible values are
6807
6808 @table @code
6809 @item x
6810 @cindex X Window System
6811 Emacs is displaying the frame using X.
6812 @item w32
6813 Emacs is displaying the frame using native MS-Windows GUI.
6814 @item ns
6815 Emacs is displaying the frame using the Nextstep interface (used on
6816 GNUstep and Mac OS X).
6817 @item pc
6818 Emacs is displaying the frame using MS-DOS direct screen writes.
6819 @item nil
6820 Emacs is displaying the frame on a character-based terminal.
6821 @end table
6822 @end defvar
6823
6824 @defvar initial-window-system
6825 This variable holds the value of @code{window-system} used for the
6826 first frame created by Emacs during startup. (When Emacs is invoked
6827 with the @option{--daemon} option, it does not create any initial
6828 frames, so @code{initial-window-system} is @code{nil}, except on
6829 MS-Windows, where it is still @code{w32}. @xref{Initial Options,
6830 daemon,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
6831 @end defvar
6832
6833 @defun window-system &optional frame
6834 This function returns a symbol whose name tells what window system is
6835 used for displaying @var{frame} (which defaults to the currently
6836 selected frame). The list of possible symbols it returns is the same
6837 one documented for the variable @code{window-system} above.
6838 @end defun
6839
6840 Do @emph{not} use @code{window-system} and
6841 @code{initial-window-system} as predicates or boolean flag variables,
6842 if you want to write code that works differently on text terminals and
6843 graphic displays. That is because @code{window-system} is not a good
6844 indicator of Emacs capabilities on a given display type. Instead, use
6845 @code{display-graphic-p} or any of the other @code{display-*-p}
6846 predicates described in @ref{Display Feature Testing}.
6847
6848 @node Bidirectional Display
6849 @section Bidirectional Display
6850 @cindex bidirectional display
6851 @cindex right-to-left text
6852
6853 Emacs can display text written in scripts, such as Arabic, Farsi,
6854 and Hebrew, whose natural ordering for horizontal text display runs
6855 from right to left. Furthermore, segments of Latin script and digits
6856 embedded in right-to-left text are displayed left-to-right, while
6857 segments of right-to-left script embedded in left-to-right text
6858 (e.g., Arabic or Hebrew text in comments or strings in a program
6859 source file) are appropriately displayed right-to-left. We call such
6860 mixtures of left-to-right and right-to-left text @dfn{bidirectional
6861 text}. This section describes the facilities and options for editing
6862 and displaying bidirectional text.
6863
6864 @cindex logical order
6865 @cindex reading order
6866 @cindex visual order
6867 @cindex unicode bidirectional algorithm
6868 @cindex UBA
6869 @cindex bidirectional reordering
6870 @cindex reordering, of bidirectional text
6871 Text is stored in Emacs buffers and strings in @dfn{logical} (or
6872 @dfn{reading}) order, i.e., the order in which a human would read
6873 each character. In right-to-left and bidirectional text, the order in
6874 which characters are displayed on the screen (called @dfn{visual
6875 order}) is not the same as logical order; the characters' screen
6876 positions do not increase monotonically with string or buffer
6877 position. In performing this @dfn{bidirectional reordering}, Emacs
6878 follows the Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm (a.k.a.@: @acronym{UBA}),
6879 which is described in Annex #9 of the Unicode standard
6880 (@url{http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr9/}). Emacs provides a ``Full
6881 Bidirectionality'' class implementation of the @acronym{UBA},
6882 consistent with the requirements of the Unicode Standard v8.0.
6883
6884 @defvar bidi-display-reordering
6885 If the value of this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil} (the
6886 default), Emacs performs bidirectional reordering for display. The
6887 reordering affects buffer text, as well as display strings and overlay
6888 strings from text and overlay properties in the buffer (@pxref{Overlay
6889 Properties}, and @pxref{Display Property}). If the value is
6890 @code{nil}, Emacs does not perform bidirectional reordering in the
6891 buffer.
6892
6893 The default value of @code{bidi-display-reordering} controls the
6894 reordering of strings which are not directly supplied by a buffer,
6895 including the text displayed in mode lines (@pxref{Mode Line Format})
6896 and header lines (@pxref{Header Lines}).
6897 @end defvar
6898
6899 @cindex unibyte buffers, and bidi reordering
6900 Emacs never reorders the text of a unibyte buffer, even if
6901 @code{bidi-display-reordering} is non-@code{nil} in the buffer. This
6902 is because unibyte buffers contain raw bytes, not characters, and thus
6903 lack the directionality properties required for reordering.
6904 Therefore, to test whether text in a buffer will be reordered for
6905 display, it is not enough to test the value of
6906 @code{bidi-display-reordering} alone. The correct test is this:
6907
6908 @example
6909 (if (and enable-multibyte-characters
6910 bidi-display-reordering)
6911 ;; Buffer is being reordered for display
6912 )
6913 @end example
6914
6915 However, unibyte display and overlay strings @emph{are} reordered if
6916 their parent buffer is reordered. This is because plain-@sc{ascii}
6917 strings are stored by Emacs as unibyte strings. If a unibyte display
6918 or overlay string includes non-@sc{ascii} characters, these characters
6919 are assumed to have left-to-right direction.
6920
6921 @cindex display properties, and bidi reordering of text
6922 Text covered by @code{display} text properties, by overlays with
6923 @code{display} properties whose value is a string, and by any other
6924 properties that replace buffer text, is treated as a single unit when
6925 it is reordered for display. That is, the entire chunk of text
6926 covered by these properties is reordered together. Moreover, the
6927 bidirectional properties of the characters in such a chunk of text are
6928 ignored, and Emacs reorders them as if they were replaced with a
6929 single character @code{U+FFFC}, known as the @dfn{Object Replacement
6930 Character}. This means that placing a display property over a portion
6931 of text may change the way that the surrounding text is reordered for
6932 display. To prevent this unexpected effect, always place such
6933 properties on text whose directionality is identical with text that
6934 surrounds it.
6935
6936 @cindex base direction of a paragraph
6937 Each paragraph of bidirectional text has a @dfn{base direction},
6938 either right-to-left or left-to-right. Left-to-right paragraphs are
6939 displayed beginning at the left margin of the window, and are
6940 truncated or continued when the text reaches the right margin.
6941 Right-to-left paragraphs are displayed beginning at the right margin,
6942 and are continued or truncated at the left margin.
6943
6944 By default, Emacs determines the base direction of each paragraph by
6945 looking at the text at its beginning. The precise method of
6946 determining the base direction is specified by the @acronym{UBA}; in a
6947 nutshell, the first character in a paragraph that has an explicit
6948 directionality determines the base direction of the paragraph.
6949 However, sometimes a buffer may need to force a certain base direction
6950 for its paragraphs. For example, buffers containing program source
6951 code should force all paragraphs to be displayed left-to-right. You
6952 can use following variable to do this:
6953
6954 @defvar bidi-paragraph-direction
6955 If the value of this buffer-local variable is the symbol
6956 @code{right-to-left} or @code{left-to-right}, all paragraphs in the
6957 buffer are assumed to have that specified direction. Any other value
6958 is equivalent to @code{nil} (the default), which means to determine
6959 the base direction of each paragraph from its contents.
6960
6961 @cindex @code{prog-mode}, and @code{bidi-paragraph-direction}
6962 Modes for program source code should set this to @code{left-to-right}.
6963 Prog mode does this by default, so modes derived from Prog mode do not
6964 need to set this explicitly (@pxref{Basic Major Modes}).
6965 @end defvar
6966
6967 @defun current-bidi-paragraph-direction &optional buffer
6968 This function returns the paragraph direction at point in the named
6969 @var{buffer}. The returned value is a symbol, either
6970 @code{left-to-right} or @code{right-to-left}. If @var{buffer} is
6971 omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the current buffer. If the
6972 buffer-local value of the variable @code{bidi-paragraph-direction} is
6973 non-@code{nil}, the returned value will be identical to that value;
6974 otherwise, the returned value reflects the paragraph direction
6975 determined dynamically by Emacs. For buffers whose value of
6976 @code{bidi-display-reordering} is @code{nil} as well as unibyte
6977 buffers, this function always returns @code{left-to-right}.
6978 @end defun
6979
6980 @cindex visual-order cursor motion
6981 Sometimes there's a need to move point in strict visual order,
6982 either to the left or to the right of its current screen position.
6983 Emacs provides a primitive to do that.
6984
6985 @defun move-point-visually direction
6986 This function moves point of the currently selected window to the
6987 buffer position that appears immediately to the right or to the left
6988 of point on the screen. If @var{direction} is positive, point will
6989 move one screen position to the right, otherwise it will move one
6990 screen position to the left. Note that, depending on the surrounding
6991 bidirectional context, this could potentially move point many buffer
6992 positions away. If invoked at the end of a screen line, the function
6993 moves point to the rightmost or leftmost screen position of the next
6994 or previous screen line, as appropriate for the value of
6995 @var{direction}.
6996
6997 The function returns the new buffer position as its value.
6998 @end defun
6999
7000 @cindex layout on display, and bidirectional text
7001 @cindex jumbled display of bidirectional text
7002 @cindex concatenating bidirectional strings
7003 Bidirectional reordering can have surprising and unpleasant effects
7004 when two strings with bidirectional content are juxtaposed in a
7005 buffer, or otherwise programmatically concatenated into a string of
7006 text. A typical problematic case is when a buffer consists of
7007 sequences of text fields separated by whitespace or punctuation
7008 characters, like Buffer Menu mode or Rmail Summary Mode. Because the
7009 punctuation characters used as separators have @dfn{weak
7010 directionality}, they take on the directionality of surrounding text.
7011 As result, a numeric field that follows a field with bidirectional
7012 content can be displayed @emph{to the left} of the preceding field,
7013 messing up the expected layout. There are several ways to avoid this
7014 problem:
7015
7016 @itemize @minus
7017 @item
7018 Append the special character @code{U+200E}, LEFT-TO-RIGHT MARK, or
7019 @acronym{LRM}, to the end of each field that may have bidirectional
7020 content, or prepend it to the beginning of the following field. The
7021 function @code{bidi-string-mark-left-to-right}, described below, comes
7022 in handy for this purpose. (In a right-to-left paragraph, use
7023 @code{U+200F}, RIGHT-TO-LEFT MARK, or @acronym{RLM}, instead.) This
7024 is one of the solutions recommended by the UBA.
7025
7026 @item
7027 Include the tab character in the field separator. The tab character
7028 plays the role of @dfn{segment separator} in bidirectional reordering,
7029 causing the text on either side to be reordered separately.
7030
7031 @cindex @code{space} display spec, and bidirectional text
7032 @item
7033 Separate fields with a @code{display} property or overlay with a
7034 property value of the form @code{(space . PROPS)} (@pxref{Specified
7035 Space}). Emacs treats this display specification as a @dfn{paragraph
7036 separator}, and reorders the text on either side separately.
7037 @end itemize
7038
7039 @defun bidi-string-mark-left-to-right string
7040 This function returns its argument @var{string}, possibly modified,
7041 such that the result can be safely concatenated with another string,
7042 or juxtaposed with another string in a buffer, without disrupting the
7043 relative layout of this string and the next one on display. If the
7044 string returned by this function is displayed as part of a
7045 left-to-right paragraph, it will always appear on display to the left
7046 of the text that follows it. The function works by examining the
7047 characters of its argument, and if any of those characters could cause
7048 reordering on display, the function appends the @acronym{LRM}
7049 character to the string. The appended @acronym{LRM} character is made
7050 invisible by giving it an @code{invisible} text property of @code{t}
7051 (@pxref{Invisible Text}).
7052 @end defun
7053
7054 The reordering algorithm uses the bidirectional properties of the
7055 characters stored as their @code{bidi-class} property
7056 (@pxref{Character Properties}). Lisp programs can change these
7057 properties by calling the @code{put-char-code-property} function.
7058 However, doing this requires a thorough understanding of the
7059 @acronym{UBA}, and is therefore not recommended. Any changes to the
7060 bidirectional properties of a character have global effect: they
7061 affect all Emacs frames and windows.
7062
7063 Similarly, the @code{mirroring} property is used to display the
7064 appropriate mirrored character in the reordered text. Lisp programs
7065 can affect the mirrored display by changing this property. Again, any
7066 such changes affect all of Emacs display.
7067
7068 @cindex overriding bidirectional properties
7069 @cindex directional overrides
7070 @cindex LRO
7071 @cindex RLO
7072 The bidirectional properties of characters can be overridden by
7073 inserting into the text special directional control characters,
7074 LEFT-TO-RIGHT OVERRIDE (@acronym{LRO}) and RIGHT-TO-LEFT OVERRIDE
7075 (@acronym{RLO}). Any characters between a @acronym{RLO} and the
7076 following newline or POP DIRECTIONAL FORMATTING (@acronym{PDF})
7077 control character, whichever comes first, will be displayed as if they
7078 were strong right-to-left characters, i.e.@: they will be reversed on
7079 display. Similarly, any characters between @acronym{LRO} and
7080 @acronym{PDF} or newline will display as if they were strong
7081 left-to-right, and will @emph{not} be reversed even if they are strong
7082 right-to-left characters.
7083
7084 @cindex phishing using directional overrides
7085 @cindex malicious use of directional overrides
7086 These overrides are useful when you want to make some text
7087 unaffected by the reordering algorithm, and instead directly control
7088 the display order. But they can also be used for malicious purposes,
7089 known as @dfn{phishing}. Specifically, a URL on a Web page or a link
7090 in an email message can be manipulated to make its visual appearance
7091 unrecognizable, or similar to some popular benign location, while the
7092 real location, interpreted by a browser in the logical order, is very
7093 different.
7094
7095 Emacs provides a primitive that applications can use to detect
7096 instances of text whose bidirectional properties were overridden so as
7097 to make a left-to-right character display as if it were a
7098 right-to-left character, or vise versa.
7099
7100 @defun bidi-find-overridden-directionality from to &optional object
7101 This function looks at the text of the specified @var{object} between
7102 positions @var{from} (inclusive) and @var{to} (exclusive), and returns
7103 the first position where it finds a strong left-to-right character
7104 whose directional properties were forced to display the character as
7105 right-to-left, or for a strong right-to-left character that was forced
7106 to display as left-to-right. If it finds no such characters in the
7107 specified region of text, it returns @code{nil}.
7108
7109 The optional argument @var{object} specifies which text to search, and
7110 defaults to the current buffer. If @var{object} is non-@code{nil}, it
7111 can be some other buffer, or it can be a string or a window. If it is
7112 a string, the function searches that string. If it is a window, the
7113 function searches the buffer displayed in that window. If a buffer
7114 whose text you want to examine is displayed in some window, we
7115 recommend to specify it by that window, rather than pass the buffer to
7116 the function. This is because telling the function about the window
7117 allows it to correctly account for window-specific overlays, which
7118 might change the result of the function if some text in the buffer is
7119 covered by overlays.
7120 @end defun
7121
7122 @cindex copying bidirectional text, preserve visual order
7123 @cindex visual order, preserve when copying bidirectional text
7124 When text that includes mixed right-to-left and left-to-right
7125 characters and bidirectional controls is copied into a different
7126 location, it can change its visual appearance, and also can affect the
7127 visual appearance of the surrounding text at destination. This is
7128 because reordering of bidirectional text specified by the
7129 @acronym{UBA} has non-trivial context-dependent effects both on the
7130 copied text and on the text at copy destination that will surround it.
7131
7132 Sometimes, a Lisp program may need to preserve the exact visual
7133 appearance of the copied text at destination, and of the text that
7134 surrounds the copy. Lisp programs can use the following function to
7135 achieve that effect.
7136
7137 @defun buffer-substring-with-bidi-context start end &optional no-properties
7138 This function works similar to @code{buffer-substring} (@pxref{Buffer
7139 Contents}), but it prepends and appends to the copied text bidi
7140 directional control characters necessary to preserve the visual
7141 appearance of the text when it is inserted at another place. Optional
7142 argument @var{no-properties}, if non-@code{nil}, means remove the text
7143 properties from the copy of the text.
7144 @end defun